Unigraphics Nx4 Manual

Practical Applications of NX
Student Guide
January 2006
MT10050 — NX 4
Publication Number
mt10050_g NX 4
Manual History
Manual Unigraphics Publication

Revision Version Date
Version 15.0 February 1999
Version 16.0 January 2000
Version 17.0 December 2000
Version 18.0 September 2001
Unigraphics NX September 2002
A Unigraphics NX 2 September 2003
A NX 3 November 2004
A NX 4 January 2006
This edition obsoletes all previous editions.
Proprietary & Restricted Rights Notice
This software and related documentation are proprietary to UGS Corp.

© 2006 UGS Corp. All Rights Reserved.
All trademarks belong to their respective holders.
©2006 UGS Corporation

All Rights Reserved.
Produced in the United States of America.
2 Practical Applications of NX mt10050_g NX 4

Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
How to Use This Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Class Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Seed Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Definitions of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Starting NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Gateway Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Cue/Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Windows File Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Activity — Creating a New Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Opening Multiple Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Activity — Opening an Existing Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Activity — Save Part As (Copying a Part) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Activity — Closing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Exiting NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
The NX User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Customizing Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Activity — Working with Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Activity — Working with Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Mouse Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Mouse Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Graphics Window View Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Selecting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Preview Selection and QuickPick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Activity — Manipulating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX 3

Contents
Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Overview of Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Manipulating the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Move WCS (Dynamics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Origin Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Axis Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rotation Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Activity — Manipulating the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Introduction to Solid Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Activity — Creating a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Defining Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Activity — Creating a Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Positional Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Creating Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Positioning Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Positioning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Activity — Positioning Holes and Bosses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Additional Positioning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Parameter Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Activity — Creating Pockets and Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Activity — Positioning a Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Editing the Size and Location of Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Edit Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Editing Features with the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Activity — Editing Positional Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Additional Positioning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Creating and Editing Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
4 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

Contents
Activity — Getting Familiar with Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Shell Feature Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Creating a Shell Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Activity — Creating a Shell Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Activity — Creating a Shell and Removing Multiple Faces . . . . . . 7-8
Activity — Creating a Shell with an Alternate Thickness . . . . . . 7-10
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Edge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Activity — Creating Edge Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Activity — Creating Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Visually Inspect the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Layer Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Moving Objects Between Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Mass Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Activity — Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Introduction to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Definitions and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Introduction to Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Load Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Load States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Load Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Activity — Setting Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
The Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Node Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Activity — Working with the Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Selecting Components in the Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Selecting Components in the Graphics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Designing in Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Assembly Navigator Pop-Up Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Contents
Activity — Working with the Assembly Navigator (continued) . . 10-23

Saving the Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Adding Components & Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

General Assembly Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Assemblies Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Assemblies Pull-down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Assemblies Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Adding Components to an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Activity — Creating an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Mate Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Align Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Angle Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Parallel Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Perpendicular Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Center Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Distance Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Tangent Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
The Mating Conditions Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Tree Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
Repositioning Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Activity — Mating the Nut Cracker Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-47
Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Datum Feature Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Creating Relative Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Common Datum Plane Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Activity — Creating Relative Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Selecting and Using Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Activity — Cylindrical Faces and Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Activity — Creating a Feature on a Relative Datum Plane . . . . 12-28
Activity — Creating a Hole Corner to Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37
Datum Axis Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38
Editing Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43
Activity — Constraining Locations using Datums . . . . . . . . . . 12-44
Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52
Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Sketching Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Contents
Sketches and the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Sketch Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Creating a New Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
The Active Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Sketch Creation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Activity — Sketch Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Sketch Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Activity — Using the Sketch Profile Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
Trimming and Extending Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
Activity — Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
Activity — Using Quick Trim and Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
Sketch Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
Activity — Adding Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54
Editing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
Activity — Editing Sketch Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59
Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-63
Show/Remove Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-66
Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-69
Activity — Adding Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-71
Activity — Constraining a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76
Activity — Sketching and Constraining a Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . 13-85
Convert To/From Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-92
Activity — Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-93
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-99
Swept Features and Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Types of Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Activity — Starting the Draglink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Start and End Limit Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Extrude with Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Extrude with Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Activity — Extruding with Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Selection Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
Activity — Extruding Using Selection Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
Sweep Along Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
Activity — Sweeping Along an Open Guide String . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
Activity — Sweeping Along a Closed Guide String . . . . . . . . . . 14-33
Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
Activity — Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
Activity — Adding a Revolved Feature to the Draglink . . . . . . . 14-42
Activity — Extruding to a Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-45
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48

Contents
Editing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Accessing the Options to Edit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Deleting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Update Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Activity — Edit and Delete Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Activity — Using the Update Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
Activity — Reordering Features with the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . 15-18
Delaying Model Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
Move Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Reattaching a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Activity — Reattaching and Moving Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32
Instance Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Instance Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Activity — Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Activity — Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Activity (Optional) — Associativity of the Rotation Axis . . . . . . 16-12
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
The Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

The Assembly Modeler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Master Model Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Activity — Exploring a Master Model Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Activity — Creating a Non-Master Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Introduction to Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

Working with Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Creating New Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Opening a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Editing a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Deleting a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Activity — Creating New Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Activity — Opening and Editing Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Drawing Monochrome Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
View Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17
Hidden Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18
Smooth Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Virtual Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
Adding a Base View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
View Creation Options Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22

Contents
Adding Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24

Editing Existing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-26
Removing Views From a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-27
Activity — Adding Views to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-28
Utility Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-33
Creating a Linear Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-36
Activity — Creating a Linear Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-37
Manually Creating a Cylindrical Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-40
Activity — Creating a Cylindrical Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-41
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-45
Annotation Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-47
Dimension Preferences and Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-48
Appended Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-50
Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-52
Text Orientation and Text Arrow Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-53
Editing an Existing Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-54
Activity — Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-56
Text Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-61
Creating Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-62
Activity — Creating Notes and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-65
The Annotation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-67
Editing Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-71
Activity — Creating More Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-72
Master Model Drawing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-75
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-76
Additional Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Project 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Project 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Project 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Project 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Project 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Project 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Project 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Project 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Project 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Project 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Project 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Project 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Project 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Project 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Project 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Project 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Project 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Project 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Project 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34

Contents
Project 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Project 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
Project 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
Expression Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Precedence and Associativity .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Legacy Unit Conversion . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Built-in Functions . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Point Constructor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Methods to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
WCS and Absolute Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Customer Defaults Levels . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Setting Customer Defaults . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
USER, GROUP, and SITE directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Managing Your Changes . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Updating to a New Release of NX . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

Overview
Intended Audience
This course is suited for designers, engineers, manufacturing engineers,
application programmers, NC programmers, CAD/CAM managers, and
system managers who have a need for understanding and using NXsoftware.
Course Objectives
After successfully completing this course, the student should be able to:
• Demonstrate knowledge of CAD/CAM theory.
• Open and examine models.
• Create and edit parametric solid models.
• Create and modify basic assembly structures.
• Create and modify simple drawings.
• Modify existing geometry.
• Apply the standards used in class.
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this class.

How to Use This Course
How to Use This Course

Activities
The format of the activities is consistent throughout this course. Steps
are labeled and specify what will be accomplished at any given point in
the activity. Below each major step are bulleted steps which describe the
individual actions that must be taken. As your knowledge of NX increases,
the action boxes will seem redundant as the step text becomes all that is
needed to accomplish a given task.
Step 1: Open the design_topic_1 part.
Choose the Open icon. (File→Open)
Double-click on the parts folder.
Select the design_topic_1 part and choose OK.

Overview
Mouse Buttons
The mouse will be used throughout this course to make selections. Examples
of different mouse devices are shown. The mouse buttons are referred to as
the first, second, and third mouse buttons, starting from left to right. On
mouses with mouse wheels, the wheel acts as mouse button 2 when it is
pressed. On two-button mouses, the buttons represent 1 and 3. Both buttons
pushed together equals mouse button 2.
The functional assignment of the mouse buttons can be reversed in

most operating systems for users who prefer that setup.
The following abbreviations are used for the mouse buttons in this course.
• MB1 — Mouse Button 1

Class Standards
Class Standards
The following standards will be used in this course. Standardization allows
you to work with and predict the organization of parts created by others. All
work should be performed in accordance with these standards.
Part File Naming

To facilitate the identification of design models without having to open a
part, standard naming conventions can be established for the various files
associated with the part definition. An example of a file naming standard
is shown below:
1 — Part Number
2 — Configuration
3 — Revision
4 — Extension
Currently up to 128 characters are valid for file names. A four

character extension (.prt) is automatically added to define the file
type. This means the maximum number of user defined characters
for the file name is actually 124.

Overview
Seed Parts
Seed parts are an effective tool for establishing customer defaults or any
settings that are part-dependent (saved with the part). This may include
non-geometric data such as:
• Preferences
• Commonly used expressions
• Layer categories
• User-defined views and layouts
• Part attributes
Once a seed part is established, it should be write-protected to avoid

accidental modification.
Two seed parts are available for use in this course, seedpart_in for inch parts
and seedpart_mm for metric parts. These parts incorporate the standards
described above.
Colors
The following colors are preset to indicate different object types:
Object Default Color

Solid Bodies Light Gray (87)
Sheet Bodies Light Dull Azure (92)
Lines and Arc Dark Hard Blue (212)
(non-sketch curves)
Conics and Splines Dark Hard Blue (212)
(non-sketch curves)
Sketch Curves Obscure Dull Green (144)
Reference Curves Dark Faded Cyan (105)
(in sketches)
Datum Features Light Weak Red (81)
Points and Coordinate Systems Dark Hard Blue (212)
System Display Color Orange Orange Red (114)
NX identifies colors using numbers with ID’s that range from 1 to 216.

Definitions of Terms
Definitions of Terms
Explicit Modeling
Explicit modeling is modeling that is not parametric. Objects are created

relative to model space, not each other. Changes to one or more objects do not
necessarily affect other objects or the finished model. Examples of explicit
modeling include creating a line between two existing points or creating an
arc through three existing points. If one of the existing points were moved,
the line/arc would not change.
Parametric Modeling
A parametric model is one in which the values (parameters) used for

the definition of the model are stored with the model for future editing.
Parameters may reference each other to establish relationships between the
various features of the model. Examples include the diameter and depth of
a hole or the length, width, and height of a rectangular pad. The designer’s
intent may be that the hole is always as deep as the pad is high. Linking
these parameters together may achieve the desired results. This is not easily
accomplished with an explicit model.
Constraint-based Modeling
A constraint-based model is one in which the geometry of the model is driven

or solved from a set of design rules applied to the geometry defining the model
as constraints. These constraints might be dimensional constraints (such
as sketch dimensions or positioning dimensions) or geometric constraints
(such as parallelism or tangency). Examples include a line tangent to an arc
where the designer intends for that tangent condition to be maintained even
though the angle of the line may change or a perpendicular condition being
maintained as angles are modified.
Hybrid Modeling
Hybrid modeling refers to the selectively combined use of the three types
of modeling described above. Hybrid modelers allow designers to use
parametric modeling where needed without requiring that the entire model be
constrained before proceeding. Because of this, designers have more flexibility
in modeling techniques. The NXhybrid modeler supports traditional explicit
geometric modeling along with constraint-based sketching and parametric
feature modeling. All tools are integrated so they can be used in combination.

1
Lesson
1 Getting Started
Purpose
This lesson is a fundamental introduction to working with NX parts.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:

• Start an NX session.
• Create a New Part.
• Open a Part.
• Copy a Part.
• Close a Part and Exit NX.
©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX 1-1

Getting Started
1
Starting NX
The first step in working in NX is to log on to a workstation and start an NX
session. Because this procedure may vary among companies and platforms,
consult your system administrator for a site specific procedure to follow.
After starting NX, you will see the "No Part" interface. This interface only
allows you to perform actions such as changing defaults and preferences,
opening an existing part, or creating a new part.
The graphics shown in this text are taken from a workstation with a
Windows operating system. The display of windows and dialogs on a
UNIX workstation will differ slightly from those shown.
1-2 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

Getting Started
1
Gateway Application
NX functions are divided into "applications". Gateway is the prerequisite
for all other interactive applications, and is the first application you enter
when you start NX and open or create a part. Gateway allows the review of
existing parts. To create or edit objects within a part, another application,
such as Modeling, must be started.
1 — Work and displayed part names 3 — Status line
2 — Cue line 4 — Resource bar

Getting Started
1
Cue/Status Line
The Cue/Status line appears at the top of the main application window. The
Cue line prompts you for user interaction. The Status line gives you feedback
about system activity.
To relocate the Cue and Status line below the graphics window,
choose Tools→Customize, choose the Layout tab, and change the
Cue/Status Position to Bottom.
Menu Bar Pull-Down Menus
The Menu Bar is a horizontal arrangement of options displayed near the top
of the main NX window. These options correspond to different NX functional
categories. Clicking the first mouse button (MB1) over a Menu Bar option
displays a pull-down menu. Arrows to the right of items in a pull-down menu
indicate that further cascading menus are available.
By default, menus appear “folded” so that only the frequently used options
are shown. The down arrow at the bottom of the menu can be selected to
display the full menu.
To permanently display the entire menus, choose Tools→Customize,

choose the Options tab, and turn on the Always Show Full Menus
option.

Getting Started
1
Windows File Dialogs
The New Part File, Open Part File, and Save Part File As dialogs have some
useful common features.
The Look in: option menu shows the name of the current selected drive or
folder.
Choosing the arrow on the right side of the box (or anywhere within the box)
will list a hierarchy of the available folders and drives. Choosing anywhere
away from the list of the available folders and drives will dismiss the listing
without selecting another folder or drive.
The list in the window below the Look In: box shows the available folders and
files. NX parts have a .prt extension.
The Up One Level option works with the Look in: option menu to
traverse back up through the folder hierarchy.

Getting Started
1
The Create New Folder option allows new sub-folders to be created in
the current folder.
The View Menu option menu allows the appearance of the listing in the
window to be modified. The default is a List. Selecting the Details button will
display a more detailed listing of the files and folders including Name, Size,
Type, last Modified date and time, and any Attributes that may apply to the
file. Other options include Thumbnails, Tiles, and Icons.
The option at the top right of the dialog changes the cursor to and
allows selection of any of the controls in the dialog for a short description
of their function.

Getting Started
1
Activity — Creating a New Part
In this activity, you will create a new part.

Step 1: Create a new part.
Choose the New icon. (File→New)

The New Part File dialog appears as shown.
Step 2: Specify the units of measure for the new part.

Verify the Millimeters option is selected for the Units.

Getting Started
1
Step 3: Key in a new part name.
With Mouse Button 1 (MB1), click in the File name field.
Key in ***_new_1, where *** represents your initials.
This will be a standard practice for this class to ensure that each
student has unique part names.
File names are governed by the naming conventions established
for the operating system on the computer. In addition, standards
set up by a company or project will affect naming conventions.
Contact your system administrator for specific information on the
number and types of characters for a valid file name.
Ensure the folder is set to your “home” folder. This will also be
a standard practice for this class. Parts that you create should
be saved in a folder to which you have permissions.
Choose OK.
The part is created and “loaded” into the current NX session.

As the creator of a part, you will have read and write access. This
means that you can modify the file and save the changes.
Step 4: Save the part.
Choose the Save icon. (File→Save)

Getting Started
1
Opening Multiple Parts
More than one part may be open (loaded) at any time. This means that you
may work on several parts concurrently. There are two special designations
for loaded parts:
• Displayed - The part is displayed in the graphics window.
• Work - The part is accessible for creation and editing operations.
In most cases the displayed part and the work part are the same. There are
times when working in an assembly when it is advantageous that the work
part be other than the displayed part.
Changing the Displayed Part
Since multiple parts may be open at any given time, you will need to control
which part is displayed in the graphics window. This can be accomplished
with the Window menu bar option.
The Window option works in two ways:
• A list of up to ten previously displayed parts is generated. This list
contains the latest displayed part at the top (excluding the currently
displayed part) and then each previous part in the order that they were
displayed until a total of ten are listed. To change the displayed part to
any of these parts, simply select its name from the list.
• Choose Window→More to display the Change Window dialog. This

dialog lists all parts being referenced in the current session, excluding
the current displayed part. This listing will include all components in
an assembly structure as well as any loaded parts not contained in a
loaded assembly.

Getting Started
1
Activity — Opening an Existing Part
In this activity, you will load an existing part into the work session.
Step 1: Open the intro_1 part.

The Open Part File dialog appears.
Check the current folder displayed in the Look in: field. If

necessary, choose the parts folder.
Notice that there are no options to specify units (Inches and

Millimeters) in the Open Part File dialog. The units of the parts
were determined when they were created and cannot be changed
within an active NX session. The units of a part can be converted
using a program called ug_convert_part.exe outside of the active
session.

Getting Started
1
Select intro_1 in the file list box and choose OK to open the part
(or double-click on the file name).
The Status Line displays information while the part is being

retrieved as well as other information pertaining to the operation
being performed.
Once the part is open the following actions occur:
• Options for viewing the contents of the file are available
on the menu bar.
• The graphics window is now active, showing the model in

the condition in which it was last saved.
• The title bar of the graphics window displays the name

of the current work part and a status of Read Only. This
means that changes may not be saved in this file.
A loaded part is only a copy of what is stored on disk. Any new

work that you do is not permanent until the part is saved on disk.
Step 2: Leave the part open. It will be used in the next activity.

Getting Started
1
Activity — Save Part As (Copying a Part)
In this activity, you will make a copy of an existing part by saving it with a
different name.
Continue using the intro_1 part.
Step 1: Create a copy of a part.
Choose File→Save As.
In the Save Part File As dialog, use the Save in: option menu
to navigate to the proper folder to save the part. (HINT: This
should be one level up from the parts folder.)
Click in the File name field.
Key in ***_intro_1 as the new part name where *** represents

your initials.

Getting Started
1
Choose OK.
The Status Line states that the part is being saved. When the
save is complete, the message “Part file saved” displays. Work
in NX may be resumed.
You can save your work and
exit NX all at once by choosing
File→Close→Save All and Exit. However,
do not close or exit at this time.

Getting Started
1
Activity — Closing Parts
In this activity, you will close parts.
Continue using the intro_1 part.
Step 1: Close a specific part.
Choose File→Close→Selected Parts.
The Close Part dialog appears showing a list of all open parts in
the session.

Getting Started
1
Select the ***_intro_1 part and choose MB2.
Because the part was not changed since it was last saved, it is
immediately closed. If the part had been changed, a warning
message would have appeared to let you know that the part has
been modified.
Closing the part does not save the part, it only clears the part from
the local memory. Changes that have been made to the part will
be lost if you continue.
Step 2: Change the displayed part.

Choose Window→***_new_1 from the menu bar.
The ***_new_1 part is now the displayed part.
Step 3: Close all parts.

Choose File→Close→All Parts.
If there are any open parts in the session that have been modified
and have not been saved, a warning message displays.

Getting Started
1
Exiting NX
You can end an NXsession, by choosing File→Exit.
If any parts are still open and have been modified without saving, a warning
message displays.
Do not exit NX at this time.

Getting Started
1
Summary
In this lesson you:
• Started an NX session.
• Created, opened, and saved parts.
• Copied a Part.
• Closed a Part.
• Exited NX.

1
Lesson
2 The NX User Interface

2
Purpose
This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the NX User Interface.
Objectives

• Customize toolbars.
• Save and restore toolbars by applying a Role.
• Select objects in the graphics window.
• Manipulate the orientation of the work view.

The NX User Interface
Toolbars
The NX user interface supports the use of toolbars to allow quick access to
functionality via logical groupings of common functionality displayed as icons.
2 Each application has a set of toolbars which support functions within that
application (e.g. Modeling, Drafting, Assemblies, etc.).
When you exit an NX session, the state of the toolbars can be saved
so that they will displayed the same when you start a new session.
This is controlled by the Save layout at exit option under the General
tab in the Preferences→User Interface dialog.
Toolbars may be in one of two states:

• Docked toolbars (1) are anchored to the main NX window, either
horizontally or vertically. Docked toolbars are always within the NX
window.
• Undocked toolbars (2) are free floating on the screen. These toolbars are
shown within the NX window, but may be located outside the window
depending on screen setup.

Customizing Toolbars
The display of the toolbars as well as the display of each element within a
toolbar may be customized.
The display of a toolbar may be controlled in one of two ways: 2
• Choose Tools→Customize from the main menu bar to access the
Customize dialog. On the Toolbars page, choose the check box next to
the toolbar name to display or hide it. The toolbars with a check are
currently displayed.
The Text Below Icon option can be used to display the names of
the icons in a toolbar.

• Use the Third Mouse Button (MB3) within the NX window but outside
the graphics window, to display a menu of all toolbars. The toolbars listed
with a check box are displayed. Choosing a toolbar name with the First
Mouse Button (MB1) will turn it on or off. The Customize option may be
2 selected to access the Customize dialog.

To turn on and off the display of icons within a toolbar, select the Toolbar
Options area of the toolbar and choose Add or Remove Buttons, and the
toolbar name. This will display a cascading menu with all of the available
icons for the toolbar. Placing a check in the box next to the command will
immediately display the icon in the appropriate toolbar. Removing the check 2
will hide the icon.
The Toolbar Options menu can be accessed in an undocked toolbar as shown

below.

Roles
NX has many advanced capabilities, but while learning you may want to
2 use a smaller set of tools. Roles let you control the appearance of the user
interface in a number of ways. Some examples are:
• What items are displayed on the menu bar
• What icons are displayed on the toolbars
• Whether or not icon names are displayed below the icons
Choosing a Role
NX comes with a number of built-in roles. There are System Defaults roles:
There are also roles that are tailored to particular industry types and
experience levels, under the Industry Specific option:
In addition, you can define your own roles.

For more information about any role, hold your cursor over its icon.
To activate a role:
• Use the Roles tab to open the palette on the resource bar.
• Click the role you want or drag it into the graphics window.
• In the warning dialog, choose OK to accept the new role or choose Cancel
to stop the change from occurring.

Activity — Working with Toolbars
In this activity, you will move toolbars in the Gateway application.

The toolbars illustrated in this activity are shown without text below
the icons. You may see this text on your screen to help you identify 2
the icons. This is controlled by choosing Tools→Customize and
specifying the Text Below Icon option for each toolbar.
Step 1: Open the intro_1 part.
Select intro_1 in the file list box and choose OK to open the part
(or double-click on the file name).
Step 2: Verify which toolbars are displayed in the Gateway Application.

Click MB3 in the toolbar area (1) and choose Customize (2).

The Customize dialog helps you identify and control which toolbars
are displayed.
The Text Below Icon option can be turned on for a toolbar

to display the names of the icons in the toolbar.
Verify that the Standard, View, Utility, Analysis, Snap Point,

and Selection toolbars are checked on.
The toolbars are displayed in a docked state. Toolbars may
be docked horizontally on the top or bottom and vertically on
the left or right.
Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog.
Step 3: Undock a toolbar.

Place the cursor on the handle portion (1) of the Analysis
toolbar and press and hold down MB1.
Drag the toolbar onto the graphics window.

Release MB1.
The name of the toolbar is displayed in its title bar while it is

undocked.
2
Step 4: Dock a toolbar.

Place the cursor on the header portion (1) of the Analysis
toolbar and press and hold down MB1.
Drag the toolbar such that the header portion falls within the
main menu bar as shown.
Release MB1.
The toolbar is docked to the NX window.

Step 5: Move a docked toolbar.

Place the cursor on the handle portion of the Analysis toolbar
and press and hold down MB1.
2
Drag the Analysis toolbar up to the first row of toolbars below

the menu bar.
Release MB1.
If necessary, select the Analysis toolbar on the handle and drag

it so that it is aligned to the right of the Standard toolbar.

Activity — Working with Roles
In this activity, you will use Roles to save and apply standard toolbar
configurations. In this course, the Essential with Full Menus role will be used.
Step 1: Continue using the intro_1 part. 2
Step 2: Apply the Essentials with Full Menus role.
Choose the Roles tab in the resource bar on the right side of the
graphics window.
If the resource is bar is not visible, choose View→Show

Resource Bar to turn it on.
Change the display of the Role palette to Tiles.

This will display smaller icons so that all of the roles can be
seen at once.

Choose the Essentials with full menus role.

The Essentials with full menus role displays a limited
number of icons and toolbars. However, all NX
functions are still available from the menu bar.
2
Choose OK in the message window warning you that your
toolbar customizations will be overwritten.
Changes you made to toolbars in previous activities are
overwritten. The toolbar settings that are defined in the
selected role are used.
Step 3: Start the Modeling application.

Choose Start→Modeling.
Starting a different application will introduce a new set of
toolbars. The toolbars that were established in the Gateway
application may move and include different icons.
Step 4: Customize a toolbar in the Modeling application.

Locate the Utility toolbar in the NX window.
Select the Toolbar Options area of the Utility toolbar and

choose Add or Remove Buttons→Utility.
Turn the Work Layer and Layer Settings icons on.
This change to the toolbar will be maintained in your future NX

sessions as long as the Save layout at exit option is turned on in
Preferences→User Interface. However, the change would be lost if
you were to apply one of the roles in the System Defaults.

Step 5: Create a new user role with the toolbar change.

Choose the Roles tab in the resource bar on the right side of
the graphics window.
Place the cursor in an open area of the Roles palette and choose 2
MB3→New User Role.
Choose OK in the Role Properties dialog to accept the default

name of MyRole_0.
The new role will appear in a User folder in the Roles palette.
If you make additional toolbar changes and want to

incorporate them into your saved user role, place the
cursor over the role and choose MB3→Edit, turn off the
Preserve Layout Information option, and choose OK.
Step 6: Close the part.

If a warning is displayed and you are asked if you are sure you
want to close the part, choose Yes.

Mouse Navigation
The mouse may be used as well as the keyboard to make selections. A mouse
wheel acts as MB2 when it is pressed. On two button mouses, the buttons
2 represent MB1 and MB3. Both buttons pressed together act as MB2.
Below is a summary of the various actions that can be performed using the
mouse buttons.
Mouse Button Action

First Mouse Button Selects or drags objects.
MB1
Second Mouse Button OK while in an operator. Press and hold down while
(center or both buttons) in the graphics window to Rotate the view. Hold
MB2 down Shift+MB2 to Pan and hold down Ctrl+MB2
to Zoom In/Out.
Third Mouse Button Displays pop-up menu with short cuts to various
(in graphic window) functions. Also displays action information for
MB3 objects selected with MB1.
Rotating mouse wheel Zooms in and out in graphics window. Scrolls in
dialog list boxes, dialog option menus, and the
Information window.
Cursor over icons or Displays either the icon or option label.
option in a dialog
Cursor over objects, Pre–highlights objects based upon the Selection
features or components toolbar setting (e.g. Select Features)
in graphics window
A combination of mouse buttons can also be used to pan (MB2+MB3)

and zoom In/Out (MB1+MB2).

Mouse Pop-up Menu

The mouse may be used to perform various actions depending upon placement
and position in the steps of the process. When the cursor is in the graphics
window and MB3 is pressed and released, the View Pop-Up menu is displayed.
This pop-up menu provides a shortcut to functions that are frequently used in
2
NX to manipulate the viewing of objects in the graphics window.

Option Description
Refreshes the entire graphics window. Erases temporary
Refresh
display entities.
2 Fit
Fits the entire part to the view. Utilizes the fit percentage
found on the Preferences→Visualization→Screen dialog.
Zoom Changes the view scale via a user specified rectangle.
Rotate Activates the Rotate mode to rotate the view with the cursor.
Pan Activates Pan mode to pan the view with the cursor.
Rendering Specifies the method of shading and hidden edges in which
Style the model is displayed.
Displays the current view in a canned view orientation. The
Orient View original visualization settings and view modifications are
retained. Active only in modeling view.
Set Rotate Defines a point that the model is rotated about. The point
Point may be defined on a curve, edge, face, or point in space.
Clear Rotate Removes the Rotate Point which has previously been set.
Point
Undo Removes the effect of the last single operation performed.
When you press and hold MB3, a radial pop-up displays icons that surround
the cursor location. These icons include display options that you can choose
just as you would from a menu. As you learn the position of the icons, just
moving the mouse in the appropriate direction will choose the option.
1 — Shaded
2 — Shaded with Edges
3 — Studio
4 — Fit
5 — Wireframe with Dim Edges
6 — Face Analysis
The View toolbar may also be used to perform many of the view
manipulation functions found in the View Pop-Up Menu.

Graphics Window View Manipulation
As you develop your model, you will need to view the model in different
orientations. The view may rotated by pressing and holding down MB2 and
dragging. 2
If the cursor is near the boundary of the graphics window, rotation about a
horizontal, vertical, or normal axis is inferred and the cursor is displayed in
a single axis rotation mode. If the cursor is in the middle of the graphics
window, the axis of rotation is determined by the direction in which you
drag the cursor.

Other options to manipulate the view orientation are described below:

Orient View – Modifies the orientation of a specified view to a predefined view.
Changes only the alignment of the view, not the view name. This option can
be invoked from the View toolbar or from the MB3 pop-up menu.
2
Home Key — Orients the present view to the Trimetric view.

End Key — Orients the present view to the Isometric view.
F8 Key — Orients the present view to a selected planar face or datum plane
or the planar view (top, front, right, back, bottom, left) that is closest to the
current view orientation.

Selecting Objects
The Selection toolbar may be used to assist in the selection of an object for
creation, modification, or information. In NX, you may either select an object
first and then choose a function to perform, or, choose a function first and
then select the required object.
2
The Selection Type Filter is used to control precisely which type of object can
be selected. When a type is chosen from this list, no other object types can
be selected. The contents of the list depends on whether you have already
chosen an NX function and which function you are performing.
There are many additional options which can be added as icons to the
Selection toolbar to further discriminate in the selection of objects. Some of
these options are also available by choosing Edit→Selection from the menu
bar.
MB3 may be used to choose an available operator for an object. The cursor
must be on top of the object and the object highlighted for the MB3 pop-up
menu to appear.
The items on the pop-up menu will vary depending on the type of object. The
following pop-up menu is typically displayed for a feature.
Options will also vary depending on the application (Modeling,

Drafting, Manufacturing, etc.).

If you press and hold MB3 over an object, a radial pop-up appears. The
options will vary depending on the type of object. The following radial pop-up
menu is typically displayed for a feature.
Deselecting Objects
If you select the wrong object, you can deselect it by holding down the <Shift>
key and selecting it again with MB1.
To deselect all objects in the graphics window, press the <Esc> key.

Preview Selection and QuickPick
Preview Selection
Preview Selection allows highlighting of objects as the selection ball
passes over them. By default, Preview Selection is enabled but may be
2
turned off by choosing Preferences→Selection from the menu bar. The
color of the highlighting is determined by the Preselection setting found
under Preferences→Visualization→Color Settings. This also applies to
highlighting objects that are being deselected using the <Shift> key and MB1.
The state of the Preview Selection setting is not saved with the part
but remains in effect for the NX session.
Using QuickPick for Multiple Selection Candidates

When selecting objects in the graphics window, more than one object will
often be within the selection ball. QuickPick is a selection confirmation
interface that provides a way to browse through multiple candidates to select
a specific object.
Moving the selection ball over an object will highlight it for preview. If there
is more than one selectable object at the selection ball location and the cursor
lingers for a short period of time, the cursor changes to a QuickPick indicator:
This cursor display indicates that there is more than one selectable object at
that position. Using MB1 after the cursor changes will display the QuickPick
dialog.
The amount of time the cursor must be stationary for the

QuickPick indicator to appear can be adjusted by choosing
Preferences→Selection and using the QuickPick Delay slider bar.

All selectable objects beneath the cursor are listed in the dialog. Use MB2
to cycle through the items in the list and then choose MB1 when the desired
object is highlighted. The icons in the dialog may be used to narrow down list
to include only construction objects, features, body objects (faces, edges, etc.),
2 components, or annotations.

Activity — Manipulating Views
In this activity, you will change the view display and orientation.
Step 1: Open the view_clevis_1 part.
2
Step 2: Manipulate the view.
Choose Shaded with Edges.

(MB3→Rendering Style→Shaded with Edges)
Click and hold MB3 and choose the Wireframe with Dim Edges
icon. from the radial pop-up.
In the graphics window, but not on top of the part, click MB3.
Choose Orient View→Right in the pop-up menu.
Press the Home key on the keyboard.

The view is oriented to the Trimetric view.

Place and hold the cursor at the location shown below until the
QuickPick indicator appears.
Choose MB1 to display the QuickPick dialog.
Choose MB2 until the front face shown below is highlighted.
Choose MB1 to confirm the selection of the face.
Press the F8 key.

The view is oriented so that the selected face is parallel to the
graphics window.
Press the Home key.

Summary
In this lesson you:
• Modified the location and contents of toolbars.
2
• Applied a Role to restore saved toolbar settings.
• Manipulated the work view orientation.

2
Lesson
3 Coordinate Systems
Purpose 3
This lesson is an introduction to the coordinate systems that are used in NX.
Objectives

• Define the Absolute Coordinate System (ABS).
• Define the Work Coordinate System (WCS).
• Move the WCS using dynamic drag handles.
• Obtain geometric information relative to the WCS.

Coordinate Systems
Overview of Coordinate Systems

Before creating solid models, you should have a basic understanding of how
NX represents the location and orientation of objects. Since you will be
creating models in a three-dimensional environment, model space is defined
as the infinite extension of a three-dimensional field represented in the views
of your graphics window.
All NX coordinate systems are right-hand, Cartesian coordinate systems,

made up of a set of X, Y, and Z axes, 90° apart from each other.
A three-axis symbol is used to identify a coordinate system. The intersection
of the axes is called the origin of the coordinate system. The origin has
the coordinate values of X=0, Y=0, and Z=0. The figure below illustrates
that, starting at the origin, each axis has a positive direction and a negative
direction.
There are several types of coordinate systems that are utilized in NX. This
lesson will discuss the following types:
• Absolute Coordinate System (ABS)
• Work Coordinate System (WCS)

Coordinate Systems
Absolute Coordinate System
The Absolute Coordinate System (ABS) is not mobile. It defines a fixed point
and orientation in model space. The Absolute Coordinate System is necessary
to relate location or orientation between different objects, solid models, parts,
and even MCAD/CAE systems. An object positioned at absolute X = 1, Y =1,
and Z =1 in one part is the exact same absolute position in any other part.
Work Coordinate System
Since the ABS is not mobile, the Work Coordinate System (WCS) is used to 3
facilitate geometry construction in different orientations. The WCS can be
located and oriented manually anywhere in model space. The WCS is not a
selectable entity.
Most modeling operations in NX do not require manual manipulation of the

WCS because features are added to a model relative to existing geometry. In
those cases, the WCS is handled automatically. However, certain functions
are dependent on the location and orientation WCS at the time they are
performed.
The location and/or orientation of the WCS will need to be considered when
using the following functions:
• Creating a Primitive Feature (specifically a Block)
• Defining a plane when creating a Sketch
• Creating a Fixed Datum Plane or Fixed Datum Axis
• Creating a Rectangular Instance Array

Coordinate Systems
Manipulating the WCS

You can access WCS options from the Utility toolbar or by choosing
Format→WCS on the menu bar while a part is displayed.
In general, there are four different options available to manipulate the WCS;
Origin, Dynamics (Move), Rotate, and Orient. The Dynamics and Orient
options will be the focus in this lesson.
3 Move WCS provides an interface to dynamically control the location

and orientation of the WCS by keying in distance and angle values or by
dragging origin, axis, and rotation handles in the graphics window.
Orient WCS displays the CSYS Constructor dialog which includes

various options to position the WCS.
The Absolute CSYS option will move the WCS back to the
Absolute origin and orientation. This can also be accomplished by
using the Set WCS to Absolute icon which can be added to the Utility
toolbar.

Coordinate Systems
Move WCS (Dynamics)

To access the Move WCS option and display the WCS in a dynamic mode,
double-click the WCS in the graphics window, turn on the Move WCS icon in
the Utility toolbar, or choose Format→WCS→Dynamics from the menu bar.
Drag handles are displayed and are used to move the WCS. These handles
are represented by a cube, three coneheads, and three spheres.
3
When the cursor passes over the WCS, it will highlight with
temporary rotation planes to indicate that it can be selected. If
there is other geometry in the vicinity and the WCS cannot be easily
selected, use the Utility toolbar or menu bar to access it.
After you move the WCS, you can either choose MB2 or turn off the Move
WCS icon to confirm the location and the WCS will return to a normal display.
Undo is available while in dynamic WCS mode and can be used to
restore the WCS to a previous location or orientation.

Coordinate Systems
Origin Handle
When you select the cube-shaped handle at the origin of the WCS, you can
relocate the WCS to any point in the graphics window as dictated by the Snap
Point toolbar (End Point, Arc Center, etc.). Help indicators will display on a
highlighted object to help you predict where the WCS will be relocated.
Snap Point Toolbar
The Snap Point toolbar becomes active when you need to specify a location.
It is available when the WCS origin handle is selected to help specify the
origin for the WCS.
Cursor Location is always available regardless of the other options that are
enabled in the toolbar.

Coordinate Systems
Point Constructor Dialog
The Point Constructor dialog is a common tool that appears throughout NX

to define a location. It is available as an icon in the Snap Point toolbar after
selecting the WCS origin handle.
With this dialog, you can define points using existing geometry, coordinate
values, or offsets.
3

Coordinate Systems
Axis Handles
When you select a conehead axis handle, a dynamic input field appears in
the graphics window next to the WCS to input a specific distance or snap
increment. You can also drag the handle to move the coordinate system along
the axis.
Double-clicking an axis handle will reverse the direction of the axis.
The Snap value is the incremental distance the WCS will move as you drag
the axis handle. The default Snap value is 0 (zero) but you may enter a
different value. The Distance value will update as you drag the handle.

Coordinate Systems
Rotation Handles
When you select a spherical rotation handle, a dynamic input field appears
next to the WCS to enter a specific angle or snap increment. You can also
drag the handle to rotate the coordinate system about the axis.
The Snap value is an incremental angle to rotate the WCS. The default
Snap value is 45 so the WCS snaps in 45 degree increments as you drag the
rotation handle. The Angle value will update as you drag the handle.

Coordinate Systems
Activity — Manipulating the WCS
In this activity, you will move the WCS to different positions and orientations
to help you obtain information about the location of points and objects on
the model.
By default, the WCS coincides with the Absolute Coordinate System in a
new part. Moving the WCS can help you obtain information about geometry
relative to a coordinate system other than the Absolute Coordinate System.
Moving the WCS is also sometimes required for certain modeling functions.
3 Step 1: Open the wcs_1 part.
Step 2: Change the Work Coordinate System origin.
Choose the Move WCS icon in the Utility toolbar.

(Format→WCS→Dynamics)
Make sure Control Point is enabled in the Snap Point

toolbar.

Coordinate Systems
Select the midpoint of the lower edge.
The origin handle is highlighted by default. You simply select

locations in the graphics window to move the WCS based on
the Snap Point toolbar settings. The WCS maintains the same
XC, YC, and ZC directions.
Choose MB2 to return the WCS to a normal display.
Step 3: Rotate the Work Coordinate System.
Choose the Move WCS icon. (Format→WCS→Dynamics)
Select the Rotation Handle shown.
A dynamic input field appears allowing an Angle or Snap to

be entered.

Coordinate Systems
Key in 90 in the Angle text entry field and press Enter.

The origin of the WCS is unchanged, the coordinate system
is rotated about the XC axis 90°. The direction of rotation is
based on the Right Hand Rule.
3
Choose MB2.
Step 4: Find the location of a point on the model relative to the WCS.
Choose Information→Point.
The Point Constructor is displayed to specify the point.
Select the arc center shown by placing the cursor over the
circular edge. When the center highlighted, select the edge.
The coordinates of the arc center relative to both the WCS and
Absolute Coordinate System are displayed in an Information
window.
Information Units Millimeters
Point XC = 0.000000000 X = 32.500000000
YC = 25.000000000 Y = 14.000000000
ZC = -14.000000000 Z = 16.000000000
Close the Information window.
Step 5: Reverse the direction of the YC Axis.

Coordinate Systems
Double-click the YC Axis Handle.

This reverses the direction of the YC Axis so that is pointing
downward.
Choose MB2.
Step 6: Change the orientation of the WCS.

The image below has been rotated for clarity. You may shade or
rotate the view for better viewing of the part.
Move the WCS origin to the location shown below.

Coordinate Systems
Select the XC Axis Handle.
Select the edge at the location shown below. A vector will

appear from the end of the selected edge.

Coordinate Systems
Select the YC Axis Handle.
Select the edge at the location shown below. A vector will

appear from the end of the selected edge.
Choose MB2 when finished orienting the WCS.
Step 7: Find the location of an object relative to the WCS.

Coordinate Systems
Choose Information→Object.
Select the lower edge of the part shown.
Choose OK in the upper left corner of graphics window

(or MB2) to accept the selected edge.
Information about the edge will appear in the Information
window. The coordinates of the start and end points are
displayed relative to both the WCS and Absolute Coordinate
System.
Edge Geometry Line
Angle = 0.000000000
Length = 33.000000000
Vertex 1 XC = 16.000000000 X = 49.000000000

YC = -0.000000000 Y = 145.069219382
ZC = -25.000000000 Z = -33.669872981
Vertex 2 XC = 49.000000000 X = 16.000000000

YC = -0.000000000 Y = 145.069219382
ZC = -25.000000000 Z = -33.669872981
Step 8: Move the WCS back to the Absolute CSYS.

Choose Format→WCS→Orient.
Choose Absolute CSYS in the CSYS Constructor dialog.

Coordinate Systems
Choose OK.
The WCS moves back to the Absolute origin and orientation.
The Set WCS to Absolute icon can be added to the Utility

toolbar. This can be used without having to use the CSYS
Constructor.
Step 9: Close all parts without saving them.

Choose Yes to confirm the closing of modified parts.

Coordinate Systems
Summary
The Absolute Coordinate System is a stationary coordinate system that
defines a fixed point in model space while the Work Coordinate System (WCS)
is a mobile coordinate system that may be moved and reoriented as necessary
to support other functions.
In this lesson you:
• Identified the difference between the Absolute Coordinate System and the
3 Work Coordinate System.
• Relocated, rotated, and reoriented the WCS.
• Reviewed the Point Constructor and CSYS Constructor dialogs.
• Obtained geometric information relative to the WCS.

Lesson
4 Introduction to Solid Modeling
Purpose
This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the NX Modeling application

through the creation of primitives.
Objectives
4
• Create and Edit a Block.
• Define a direction vector.
• Create and edit a Cylinder.

Introduction to Solid Modeling
Primitives
A Primitive is a solid object that is analytic in nature. A Primitive may be
thought of as "raw stock" to which material will be added or removed to
achieve the finished part. There are multiple ways of defining each of the four
Primitive types. Primitives may be used as the basic shape at the start of
the solid modeling process.
When a Primitive is created, its type and its size must be specified as well as
its location and orientation in model space.
The four types of Primitives are:
• Block
• Cylinder
4
• Cone
• Sphere
If a Primitive is used in a part, it should be used as the initial solid

feature. Although NX allows the use of multiple Primitives in one
solid body, the practice is not recommended because of the advantages
and associativity of other solid modeling functionality.
Primitives are positioned explicitly. Their origins are set by a

specified point in model space. However, they can be moved manually
by either using Transform or the Move Feature functions. The
creation parameter values of a Primitive may be edited and made
associative to each other.

Block
A Block may be created by specifying the size and location of the block in
model space. The orientation will be implied from the orientation of the WCS.
There are three different methods that may be used to create a Block, Origin
Edge Lengths, Two Points Height, and Two Diagonal Points. The middle
portion of the dialog and the Selection Steps change depending on the type
of Block creation method you choose. This lesson discusses the first method,
Origin, Edge Lengths.

Origin, Edge Lengths Method
• Choose Insert→Design Feature→Block or choose the Block icon

in the Form Feature dialog.
• Choose the Origin, Edge Lengths type.
• Define the length for each edge.

The Length, Width, and Height are measured relative to the XC,
YC, and ZC axes of the WCS, respectively. These must be positive
values since they are stored as the parameters of the block.
4 • Specify the origin of the corner of the block. The Snap Point toolbar is
available to access the Point Constructor dialog or to specify a point
relative to existing geometry. The edges of the block will be parallel to
the XC, YC, and ZC axes.
If an origin is not specified explicitly and OK is chosen, the corner
of the block will be placed at the WCS origin.
• Choose OK or Apply.
After the block has been created, its size may be changed by editing the
values that were used for edge lengths during creation.

Activity — Creating a Block
In this activity, a Block will be created using the Origin, Edge Lengths
method. Only numerical values will be used for the size of the block.
Step 1: Create a new inch part and name it ***_block_1 where ***
represents your initials.
Step 2: Start the Modeling application. (Start→Modeling)
Step 3: Create a Block.
Choose Insert→Design Feature→Block.
4
Verify the Origin, Edge Lengths type is selected.
Key in the following parameters: Length (XC) = 8 (Tab)Length

(YC) = 6 (Tab)Length (ZC) = 6/2 (an example of algebraic entry)
Choose MB2.
Choose the Fit icon from the View toolbar. (MB3→Fit)
Step 4: Change the size of the block.
Place the cursor over the block and double-click on it.
Select the p1=6.000 parameter to edit.

Change the parameter value to 4 and choose MB2 twice.
4
Step 5: Choose File→Close→Save and Close.

Cylinder
A cylinder may be created by specifying the orientation, size and location of
the cylinder. There are two methods to create a cylinder.
• Diameter, Height
• Height, Arc
Diameter, Height Method
This method is used to create a cylinder by specifying the diameter and

height values. The location and axis direction vector must also be specified.
After choosing this method:
• Define the cylinder axis vector using the Vector Constructor.
4
• Key in the Diameter and Height.
• Define the cylinder origin using the Point Constructor.

Defining Vectors
The Cylinder and Cone features require a direction vector to be specified to

define the orientation of the axis. The Vector Constructor dialog is used to
specify this direction.
The XC, YC, and ZC Axis options are sufficient for the purpose of
this course.
In the example below, the direction vector is the ZC Axis. The cylinder
is shown created at an origin away from the WCS with a specified
height in the direction of the vector.

Activity — Creating a Cylinder
In this activity, a cylinder will be created utilizing the direction vector menu.
Step 1: Open the seedpart_mm part.
Step 3: Create the Cylinder.

Choose Insert→Design Feature→Cylinder.
Choose Diameter, Height.
Choose the YC Axis direction icon in the Vector Constructor

dialog. 4
Key in the following values:
Diameter = 75
Height = 200
Choose OK. (MB2)
Locate the cylinder at XC=0, YC=0, ZC=0. Choose Reset in the

Point Constructor menu if needed and choose OK.
Choose Cancel.
Choose Fit from the MB3 pop-up menu.
Step 4: Edit the size of the cylinder.

Place the cursor over the cylinder and double-click on it.
Choose Feature Dialog.

Change the values as follows:
Diameter = 15
Height = 150
Choose MB2 twice.
Step 5: Choose File→Close→All Parts. Do not save the part.

Summary
This lesson was an introduction to the creation of solid models using primitive
features. If a primitive feature is used, it should be the base feature and there
should only be one in a part because they cannot be associatively positioned.
In this lesson you:
• Created a block.
• Changed the size of a primitive after creation.
• Created and edited a cylinder.
• Reviewed the Vector Constructor dialog.

4

4
Lesson
5 Positional Form Features
Purpose
This lesson introduces Form Features that can be associatively positioned

from other features.
Objectives

• Create Hole, Boss, Pocket, Pad, Slot, and Groove features.
• Position features. 5
• Edit the parameters and position of features.

Positional Form Features
Creating Form Features

Form features are used to add detail to a model. These features include holes,
slots, bosses, pads, pockets and grooves. Form features are fully associative
to the geometry and parameter values used to create them. These features
can be accessed by choosing Insert→Design Feature or by adding them to the
Form Feature toolbar.
5
Placement Face
All form features require a placement face. For a groove, the placement face
must be cylindrical or conical. For all other form features, the placement face
must be planar. This planar placement face defines the X-Y plane of the
coordinate system for the feature being created. Features are created normal
to the placement face.
A datum plane may be used as the planar placement face. In the following
example, the datum plane is used as the Planar Placement face for the hole
feature.

Horizontal and Vertical Reference
The Horizontal Reference defines the X axis of the feature coordinate

system. Any linear edge, planar face, datum axis, or datum plane that can
be projected onto the planar placement face may be selected to define the
horizontal direction.
A Horizontal Reference is required to define the length direction of form
features having a Length parameter (slot, rectangular pocket, and pad). It
is also required to define horizontal or vertical positioning dimensions for
features that do not initially require a Horizontal Reference (holes, bosses,
and cylindrical pockets).
1 — Planar Placement Face

2 — Horizontal Reference
3 — X Length of Feature
If there are no selectable objects to define a horizontal direction, you can

specify a Vertical Reference instead. The horizontal direction will be inferred
as being perpendicular to it.
Feature Coordinate System
The WCS will move automatically to facilitate the creation of a feature based
on the selected placement face and reference direction. The coordinate system
being represented is called a Feature Coordinate System (FCS) and is stored
with the feature definition. The WCS will return to the FCS orientation when
you edit the position of the feature.

Positioning Form Features
Positioning dimensions are distance values measured along the placement

face. They may be used to place the form feature at the proper location on
the placement face. These dimensions should be considered as constraints, or
rules, that the geometry must obey.
1 — Horizontal 6 — Angular
2 — Vertical 7 — Point onto Point
3 — Parallel 8 — Point onto Line
4 — Perpendicular 9 — Line onto Line
5 — Parallel at a Distance
Only the dimension types that apply to the feature being creating
will be displayed.
Positioning dimensions are not required, but it is recommended that they be

added when features are created for ease of future editing.

Hole
This option is used to create simple, counterbore, and countersink holes in

an existing solid. The middle portion of the dialog contains fields to enter
parameters and will vary depending on the type of hole that is chosen. The
dialog below appears for the Simple hole type.
Hole Creation Procedure
• Choose the Hole icon (Insert→Design Feature→Hole).
• Choose the Type (Simple, Counterbore, or Countersink).
• Select the placement face. If a datum plane is selected choose the Reverse
Side button as required.
• Select the thru face if applicable.
• Key in the required parameter values.
• Choose OK or Apply.
• Create positional dimensions as required.

Hole Types
Simple 1 – Diameter
2 – Depth
3 – Tip Angle
Counterbore 1 – C-Bore Diameter

2 – C-Bore Depth
3 – Hole Depth
Countersink 1 – C-Sink Diameter

2 – C-Sink Angle
5 3 – Hole Depth

Boss
The Boss feature is used to add a cylindrical shape with a specified height to
a model, having either straight or tapered sides.
1 — Diameter
2 — Height
3 — Taper Angle
A positive or negative value may be entered depending on which way the wall
is to incline. A zero value results in a vertical cylinder wall.
5

Positioning Terminology
• Fully Specified — The feature is uniquely located by the positioning

dimensions specified.
• Underspecified — The feature position is not completely constrained.
• Overspecified — The feature has had more positioning constraints

applied to it than are necessary.
• Target Solid — The solid body that a Boolean operation acts upon. In the
context of a Form Feature it is the solid body that the Hole, Slot, Pocket or
Groove will subtract from, or a Boss or Pad will unite with.
• Target Edge — An edge on the Target Solid that is selected for positioning
purposes.
• Tool Solid — The solid representation of the feature being defined

by the current operation. In the context of a Form Feature it is the
representation of the Hole, Slot, Pocket, Pad, Boss, or Groove that will be
5 subtracted from or united with the Target Solid.
• Tool Edge — An edge on the Tool Solid that is selected for positioning
purposes.

Positioning Methods
Horizontal
Specifies the horizontal distance between two points, one on the target solid
and the other on the tool solid. Horizontal is measured along the X-axis of the
feature coordinate system (the Horizontal Reference). As edges are selected,
the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).
2 — Target Edge (End Point)
3 — Tool Edge (Tangent Point)
Vertical
Specifies the vertical distance between two points, one on the target solid and
the other on the tool solid. Vertical is measured along the Y-axis of the feature
coordinate system (perpendicular to the Horizontal Reference). As edges are
selected, the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).
2 — Target Edge (End Point)
3 — Tool Edge (Arc Center)

Perpendicular
Specifies the shortest (normal) distance between a linear edge on the target
solid (also datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid. The linear
target edge is always selected first.
1 — Target Edge
5
Point onto Line
Specifies that the distance between an edge on the target solid (also datum
planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid is zero.
1 — Target Edge (Datum Plane)
Point onto Line is the same as the Perpendicular positioning

dimension with the value automatically set to zero. You can change it
to a non-zero value when you edit the feature.

Parallel
Specifies the shortest distance between two points, one point on the target
solid and the other point on the tool solid. As edges are selected, the nearest
valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).
1 — Target Edge (Arc Center)
Point onto Point
Specifies the distance between a point on the target solid and a point on the
tool solid is zero. This is commonly used to align arc centers (concentric) of
cylindrical or conical features. This method fully constrains their location
since rotation is not a degree of freedom for cylindrical or conical features.
1 — Target Edge (Arc Center)
Point onto Point is the same as the Parallel positioning dimension with
the value automatically set to zero. You can change it to a non-zero
value when you edit the feature.

Activity — Positioning Holes and Bosses
In this activity, you will create and position hole and boss features.
Step 1: Open the form_feature_1 part.
Step 3: Create a boss.

Choose Insert→Design Feature→Boss.
5
Diameter = 2
Height = .125
Taper Angle = 0

Select the top face of the block (1) as the placement face.
Choose OK (MB2).
Notice Perpendicular is already selected.

Select edge (2) and enter a value of 4.
Select edge (3) and enter a value of 3.
Choose OK. (MB2)
Step 4: Create a simple thru hole.
Choose the Hole icon. (Insert→Design Feature→Hole)
Choose Simple for the hole Type.
Key in a Diameter of 1.

Select the top face of the boss (1) as the placement face and the
bottom face of the block as the thru face.
Choose Apply.
Choose Point onto Point.
Select the top edge (2) of the boss.
Choose Arc Center.
Step 5: Create a counterbore thru hole.
Choose Counterbore for the hole Type.
C-Bore Diameter = 1
C-Bore Depth = .5
Hole Diameter = .5

Select the top face of the block as the placement face and the
Choose Apply.
Verify Perpendicular is selected.

Select edge (1) and enter a value of 1.5.
Choose OK (MB2).
Step 6: Create another counterbore hole.
Verify that Counterbore is still selected.
Verify the following values:
C-Bore Diameter = 1
C-Bore Depth = .5
Hole Diameter = .5

Select the top face of the block as the placement face and the
Choose Apply.
Verify Perpendicular is selected.

Choose OK (MB2).
Step 7: Create a simple hole.
Choose Simple
Diameter = .25
Depth = 1
Tip Angle = 0

Select the top face of the block as the placement face in the
approximate location shown (1).
Choose Apply.
Choose Horizontal .
Select a front edge (2) of the block as the
Horizontal Reference, select the edge of the boss (3) as the
target edge, and choose the Arc Center option.
Key in a value of 1.375 and press Enter.
Choose Vertical.
Select the edge of the boss again as the target edge and choose
the Arc Center option.
Key in a value of 1.25.
Choose OK.

If the placement face was selected near the right or back of

the block, the hole may initially be positioned on the wrong
side of the target edge. The location where you select the
placement face will determine the initial feature location.
Always select the placement face approximately where
you want the feature to be located. If the hole is on the
wrong side of the target edge, you will have to change the
positioning dimension to a negative value.
Step 8: Create another simple thru hole that is aligned with the edges of
the front face of the block.
Verify the Simple hole type is selected.
Select the right face of the block (1) as the placement face and
left face (2) as the thru face.
5
Choose OK.

Choose Point onto Line .

Select the front edge (3) of the block.
Choose Perpendicular .
Select the bottom right edge (4).
Key in a value of 1.5 and choose OK.
Step 9: Create another hole in the corner of the part.
Verify the Simple hole type is selected.
Select the top face of the block as the placement face and
bottom face as the thru face.
Choose OK.

Choose Point onto Point .

Select the back right corner of the block (1).
5
The completed part should appear as shown.

Slot
This option allows you to create a slot in a solid body as if cut by a milling
machine tool. In each case, the shape of the cutting tool corresponds to the
slot type and dimensions.
The slot feature will be created so that the axis of the cutting tool is normal to
the face or datum plane selected. Initially, the path of the slot will be parallel
to the selected Horizontal Reference.
There are several different slot types available. You will be prompted for the
parameters that apply to the type of slot chosen.
Rectangular Slot
The Rectangular slot type uses a tool that has cylindrical end faces and will
produce sharp edges along the bottom of the slot.
1 — Length
2 — Width
3 — Depth 5
The Width of the rectangular slot represents the diameter of the cylindrical
cutting tool.
The Depth of the slot is measured in a direction parallel to the tool axis from
the placement face to the bottom of the slot. Depth values must be positive.
The Length is measured parallel to the horizontal reference (X in the feature
coordinate system). Length values must be positive.

Other Slot Types
The other available slot profiles are shown below.
Ball-End
U-Slot
T-Slot
Dove-Tail
Creating a Thru Slot
The Thru Slot option can be applied to all slot types and extends the length of
5 the slot along the placement face in the direction of the horizontal reference
between two specified faces.
You will be prompted to select starting and ending thru faces instead of a
length parameter. The two thru faces cannot be parallel to the placement face.
The rectangular slot shown below was created with the Thru Slot option
enabled. The selected starting and ending thru faces are shaded.
You should not dimension to the end arcs of the slot when positioning a Thru
Slot. The length of a Thru Slot is determined by the selected thru faces. The
only positioning dimension required is to locate an edge or centerline along
the length of the slot (tool) to a target edge or datum. Parallel at a Distance
can be used to constrain the feature and control the two remaining degrees
of freedom.

Pocket
The pocket feature is used to create a cavity in a solid body.

There are three types of pockets:
• Cylindrical (not covered in this lesson)
• Rectangular
• General (not covered in this lesson)
Rectangular Pocket
This option allows a rectangular pocket to be defined to a specified depth, with

or without a floor and/or corner radius, having either straight or tapered walls.
The following parameters may be specified:
1 — Length
2 — Width 5
3 — Depth
4 — Corner Radius
5 — Floor Radius
6 — Taper Angle
The pocket is initially oriented so that the Length is parallel to the

selected Horizontal Reference.
Pocket features may be positioned from a tool edge or from the centerlines
provided for this purpose.

Pad
This option allows a raised pad on a solid body.

There are two types of pads:
• Rectangular
• General (not covered in this lesson)
Rectangular Pad
This option allows a rectangular pad to be defined to a specified height, with

or without a corner radius and/or taper.
The following parameters may be specified:
1 — Length
2 — Width
3 — Height
5 4 — Corner Radius
5 — Taper Angle
The pad is initially oriented so that the Length is parallel to the

selected Horizontal Reference.

Additional Positioning Methods
Parallel at a Distance
Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also a datum plane or datum
axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be parallel and at a given
distance. This is typically used for features with length (slot, pocket or pad).
1 — Target Edge
2 — Tool Edge (Centerline of Slot)
Using Parallel at a Distance will solve two of the three degrees of freedom
necessary to fully specify a feature having a length (rotation and translation
in one direction). Adding another Parallel at a Distance or Line onto Line
dimension would overspecify the location of the feature.
To fully specify the feature in the example an additional positioning
dimension is required to solve the final degree of freedom (i.e. Horizontal,
Vertical, Perpendicular).

Line onto Line

Specifies that the distance between a linear edge on the target solid (or a
datum plane or datum axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid is zero and
they are constrained parallel to each other. This is typically used for features
with length (slot, pocket, or pad).
1 — Target Edge (Datum Plane)
2 — Tool Edge (Centerline of Slot)
5
Using Line onto Line will solve two of the three degrees of freedom necessary
to fully specify a feature having a length (rotational and translation in one
direction). Adding another Line onto Line or Parallel at a Distance dimension
would overspecify the location of the feature. To fully specify the feature in
the above example an additional positioning dimension is required to solve
the final degree of freedom (i.e. Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Point onto Line).
Line onto Line is the same as the Parallel at a Distance positioning
dimension with the value automatically set to zero. This zero value
can be changed to a non-zero value when editing the feature.

Angular
Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also a datum plane or datum
axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be at a given angle to each
other. The angle is measured in a counter-clockwise direction (with respect to
the feature coordinate system), from the ends of the edges nearest to where
they are selected.
1 — Target Edge
2 — Tool Edge (Edge of Pocket)

Parameter Entry Options
Parameter Entry Options let you easily define your model parametrically as
you specify values during feature creation. They are accessed by choosing
the “down-arrow” icon located next to many of the parameter entry fields
throughout the Modeling application.
Options are provided to let you specify a value based on a formula, a reference
to an existing value, or a derived value from a measurement without having
to copy and paste or reenter the values.
5 You can use these options to easily lookup functions and define relationships
between features. You can use values that already exist in your model,
making downstream changes easier and in agreement with your design
intent.
Referencing Existing Parameters
Choosing the Reference option will display a Parameter Selection dialog

and allow you to select an existing feature. Once a feature is selected, it’s
parameters are listed in a dialog. Selecting one of the parameters and
choosing OK will insert it into the entry field.

Activity — Creating Pockets and Slots

In this activity, you will locate a pocket and slot using the Line onto Line and
Parallel at a Distance positioning methods.
Step 1: Open the form_feature_2 part.
Step 3: Create and locate the rectangular pocket.

Choose Insert→Design Feature→Pocket. 5
Choose Rectangular.
Select the placement face (1) and horizontal reference (2) as

indicated below.
The design intent is that the length of the pocket be the same
as the Y Length of the block.

Choose the Parameter Entry Option down-arrow button.

next to the Length field and choose the Reference option.
Select the block feature from the graphics window.
Choose the BLOCK(0) Size Y parameter from the Parameter

Selection dialog and choose OK.
The parameter for the size of the block appears in the Length
field for the pocket. This “p-number” may be different in your
part.
Key in the remaining values:

Width = 1
Depth = .25
Corner Radius = 0
Floor Radius = 0
Taper Angle = 0

Choose OK.
Choose Line onto Line and select the target (1) and the
tool (2) as indicated below.
Choose Point onto Line and select the target (3) and
the tool (4) as indicated below.
Choose Insert→Design Feature→Slot.
Verify the Thru Slot option is turned off and choose

Rectangular.

Select the placement face (1) and horizontal reference (2) as

indicated below.
5
The design intent is that the depth of the slot be the same as
the X Length of the block.
Length = 1
Width = .55
Press the Tab key to highlight the Depth field (or double-click
in the Depth field).
Choose the Parameter Entry Option down-arrow button

next to the Depth field and choose the Reference option.
Select the block feature from the graphics window.
Choose the BLOCK(0) Size X parameter from the Parameter

Selection dialog and choose OK.
The parameter, or “p-number” for the X Length of the block

will appear in the Depth field of the slot.
Choose OK.

Choose Parallel at a Distance and select the target (1)

and the tool (2) as indicated below. Key in a value of 1 and
choose OK.
Choose Perpendicular and select the target (3) and the

tool (4) as indicated below. Key in a value of 1.25.
Choose OK.

Groove
The groove feature requires a cylindrical or conical placement face. A groove

can be thought of as a feature that would result from a part being cut in a
lathe. After specifying the groove parameters, you will be shown a preview
of the tool solid. The tool solid can be thought of as the path that the lathe
would make as it cuts the solid.
Positioning a Groove
You only have to position a groove along the axis of the cylindrical or conical
placement face. The Positioning dialog will not appear. Instead, you are only
required to specify a horizontal dimension along the axis by selecting a target
edge followed by a tool edge or centerline.
Two grooves are shown in the following example.
1 — Target Edge
2 — Tool Edge (or centerline)
5

Activity — Positioning a Groove
In this activity, you will create a groove feature and position it along the
axis of a cylindrical solid body.
Step 1: Open the groove_1 part.

5
Step 3: Create and locate the groove.
Choose Insert→Design Feature→Groove.
Choose Rectangular.
Select the outside cylindrical face as the placement face.
Groove Diameter = 2.25

Width = .25
Choose OK.

Select the front outside circular edge (1) as the target edge and
the centerline of the groove (2) as the tool edge.
Key in a value of 1.5 to position the groove and choose OK

(MB2).

Editing the Size and Location of Form Features

As features are created the parametric data is captured in expressions.
The parametric data consists of the actual feature size definition (i.e.
diameter, height, length) as well as the positional data that is captured in
the positioning dimensions.
Edit Parameters
The Edit Parameters and Edit with Rollback options allow you to redefine the
parameter values of any parametric feature and update the model to reflect
the new values. To edit the parameters of a feature:
• Select the feature to edit.
– With the cursor over the feature, choose MB3→Edit Parameters or
MB3→Edit with Rollback.
– Double-click on a feature. (The default action is Edit with Rollback.)
– Double-click the feature or use the MB3 popup menu in the Part
Navigator. 5
– Choose Edit→Feature→Edit Parameters and select the feature.
– Choose the Edit Feature Parameters icon and select the feature.
• Select the parameters to edit.

– Some parameters will appear in the graphics window.
– Any of the valid parameters types may be chosen from the Edit
Parameters dialog. This displays the original creation dialog where
the parameters may be edited.
• Choose OK until the editing dialogs are dismissed and the model updates.
Edit with Rollback
This option allows you to edit the parameters of a feature but it also
temporarily returns the model to its state when the feature was created. The
features that occur after the edited feature in the model history are hidden
from the display.
This simplifies the display and makes it easier to select features to reference
when using the Parameter Entry options.

Edit Positioning
This option allows a feature to be moved by editing its positioning dimensions.

In addition, positioning dimensions may be added to features that are either
underspecified or were not given any positioning dimensions at the time
of creation.
Once the feature has been selected, the following options are offered based
upon the positioning status of the selected feature.
5 If the selected feature has no positioning dimension associated with

it, the Add Dimension option is automatically selected.
To edit the position of a feature:

• Select the feature to edit.
– With the cursor over the feature in the graphics window, choose
MB3→Edit Positioning.
– With the cursor over the feature in the Part Navigator, choose
– Choose Edit→Feature→Positioning and then select the feature to edit.
– Choose the Edit Feature Positioning icon and select the feature
to edit.
• Choose the type of edit (Add, Edit, or Delete).
• Select an existing dimension or new dimension type.
• Choose OK until the editing dialogs are dismissed and the model updates.

Add Dimension
This option may be used to add a positioning dimension to a feature.

When adding positioning dimensions, any edge (1) resulting from the
intersection of the feature being positioned (2) and a face on the target solid
(3) may not be selected as the tool edge.
The intersection edge is a child object of the tool and target solid’s face and
is defined by the boolean operation associated with the feature type being
created. The boolean operation does not occur until after the position of the
feature has been defined. Therefore, the intersection edge is not a valid
selection to specify location. 5
When adding positioning dimensions to a Thru Hole, no edges will be
selectable as the target edge because both edges are intersection edges. The
Identify Solid Face option is used to select the center of the cylindrical face (1).

Valid target edges for positioning purposes must belong to features existing
in the feature creation list of the model before the feature being positioned.
In the example below the features are numbered in the order in which they
were created. Feature (2) may not be positioned using any face or edge from
feature (3). If an edge or face from feature (3) is selected as a target, a message
is displayed stating that you cannot select an object from a later feature and a
dialog will let you highlight those edges and faces which can be selected.
5
Edit Dimension Value
Features may be moved by changing the values of the feature’s positioning

dimensions.
To use this option:
• Select the dimension to edit (if there is only one positioning dimension, it
is selected automatically).
• Key in the new value.
Continue editing as many dimension values as desired. Once all the desired
dimension values have been edited, choose OK.
Delete Dimension
Use this option to delete a positioning dimension from a feature. The feature
will then remain in its current location as its position is no longer associated
to the model.
If you are replacing a dimension, add the new dimension before
deleting the old one. The Edit Positioning dialog is maintained when
you add a dimension but is automatically dismissed when you delete
a dimension.

Error Messages
If the model cannot be updated based on the new parameters or location of

the feature, the Edit During Update dialog will be presented. This dialog
provides several options for dealing with the failed update.
You can choose Show Current Model followed by the Show Failure
Area option to help identify the problem visually.

Editing Features with the Part Navigator
The Part Navigator is a powerful tool that may be used to identify and edit
features. Holding down MB3 on a feature node in the Part Navigator displays
a feature specific pop-up menu. This menu provides an alternative method to
edit the parameters and the position of a form feature.
To access the Part Navigator, choose the icon on the resource bar on the right
side of the NX window.
If the resource is bar is not visible, choose View→Show Resource

Bar to turn it on.

Activity — Editing Positional Form Features
Step 1: Open the edit_feature_3 part.
Step 3: Edit size parameters.

In the graphics window, select the hole feature indicated below.
With the cursor over the highlighted hole feature, click MB3
and choose Edit Parameters.
Change the Diameter to .375 and choose OK twice.

Notice that both holes changed. This is because a referenced
parameter was established when the second hole was created.
Step 4: Edit the position.

In the graphics window, select the same hole as before.

and choose Edit Positioning.
Choose Edit Dimension Value.
In the graphics window, select the positioning dimension that

equals 2.625 and change the value to 3.25.
Choose OK three times to finish the update.

Notice how both holes changed location. This is because a
referenced parameter was established when the second hole
5 was positioned.

Step 5: Change a hole type.

In the graphics window, select the counterbore hole indicated
below.
5
and choose Edit Parameters.
Choose Change Type.
Choose Simple and choose OK.
Choose OK to accept the Diameter value of .3125.
Choose OK again to complete the edit of the hole.
Step 6: Change the positioning design intent.

In the graphics window, select the same hole that you just
edited.
and choose Edit Positioning.
Choose Add Dimension.
Choose Perpendicular.

Select the front edge, as shown below, as the target edge.
Because the hole was created as a thru hole, you are limited in
what you can select for a tool edge. In cases where you cannot
5 select an appropriate tool edge or, if the resulting edge is not
a true circle (like shown at one end), you can use the Identify
Solid Face option.
Choose Identify Solid Face.
Select the cylindrical face of the hole as shown below.

Accept the dimension value by choosing OK. Notice the Status

line indicates that the feature position is overspecified.
There are two dimensions competing against each other. The
design intent was changed to locate the hole from the front
edge of the part so you will need to delete the old dimension
causing the overspecified condition.
Choose OK in the Positioning dialog.
Choose Delete Dimension.
Select the existing dimension causing the overspecified

condition and choose OK.

Additional Positioning Techniques
Information→Feature
Choosing Information→Feature will display a Feature Browser dialog where

you can obtain detailed information about features in a model. Selecting a
feature and choosing OK or Apply will display an Information window.
Accessing the Information pull-down menu options will not cancel feature
construction dialogs. This allows you to find necessary information needed
while creating new features.
You can also list information about a feature by highlighting it in the
graphics window, choosing MB3→Properties, and then choosing the
Information icon in the Properties dialog.
Display Dimensions
The Display Dimensions option in the Feature Browser temporarily displays

the parameters of size and location in the graphics window for the feature.
5 Refreshing the graphics window removes the temporary display of the
parameters.
Display Dimensions can also be accessed using the Part Navigator.

Positioning from Edges
When you select an edge of the target solid to constrain a feature, a curve is
extracted to match that edge. This curve is maintained internally and is
linked to the target solid. If you modify the edge (for example, by adding a
blend), the constraint is maintained to the original edge.
Try to position features from edges before they are blended. This minimizes
potential update errors when blends are modified or deleted. You can use the
Make Current Feature option, within the Part Navigator, to add the feature
before the blend feature in the Model History.
When positioning from edges, select edges that are less likely to be
affected by downstream features and editing operations. This will
reduce the chances of future model update failures.

Summary
In this lesson you were introduced to Form Features. Form features are used
to add detail to the model during creation. Form features are fully associative
to the geometry and parameter values used to create them. The different
form features are: Hole, Boss, Pocket, Pad, Slot, and Groove.
This lesson you:
• Identified a Placement Face.
• Identified a Horizontal Reference.
• Identified Target and Tool Solids.
• Created Hole, Boss, Pocket, Pad, Slot, and Groove features.
• Applied positioning dimensions form features.
• Edited parameters and positioning dimensions of form features.

5

Lesson
6 Expressions
Purpose
This lesson is a fundamental introduction to Expressions.
Objectives

• Create Expressions.
• Edit Expressions.

Expressions
Overview
Expressions are arithmetic or conditional formulas that define the
characteristics of a part. Expressions define the dimensions and relationships
of a model.
Expressions are automatically created when:
• a feature is created.
• a sketch is dimensioned.
• a feature is positioned.
All expressions have a single, unique name and a string or formula that
can contain a combination of variables, functions, numbers, operators, and
symbols.
Expression names are variables that you can insert in the formula strings of
other expressions. This can be helpful in breaking up lengthy formulas as
well as defining relationships that can be used in place of numbers.
Expression formulas are evaluated for values.
Here are some examples of expressions, their formulas and their resulting
values:
6 Expression Name Formula Value

length 5*width 20
p39 (Extrude(6) End Limit) p1+p2*(2+p8*sin(p3)) 18.849555921
p26 (Simple Hole(9) Tip Angle) 118 118
Expression names are no longer case sensitive, with the following

exceptions:
• Expression names are case sensitive if their dimensionality is
set to Constant.
• Expression names are case sensitive if they were created before
NX 3.
When expression names are case sensitive, they must be referenced

exactly when used in other expressions.

Expressions
Creating and Editing Expressions

To work with expressions, choose Tools→Expression.
The Expressions Dialog with Less Options
1 Expression Name Up to 132 letters, numbers, or underscore.

Must begin with a letter.
Case Sensitive.
2 Formula Can contain a combination of numbers,
functions, operators, and other expression 6
names.
3 Dimensionality Choose from Constant, Length, Area, Volume,
Mass, and many others
4 Units Units appropriate to the dimensionality will be
available in a pull-down.
The system will handle unit conversions
automatically if, for example, you specify
inches in a metric part.
Not active during editing or if dimensionality
is constant.
5 More Options

Expressions
The Expressions Dialog with More Options
6
1 Listed Choose from User Defined, Named, Filter by
Expressions Name, Filter by Value, Filter by Formula,
Unused Expressions, Object Parameters,
Measurements, and All
2 Expression list List contains columns for Name (followed by
usage in the part), Formula, Value, Units, and
Comment
3 Accept Edit
4 Reject Edit
5 Less Options

Expressions
Creating Expressions
There are three methods to create expressions:

• System generated expressions (p#).
• User defined expressions created during text input (Rad=5.00).
• Predefined, user created expressions (Thk=0.60, Thk used as a text entry

in a parameter field).
Procedure:
• Choose the Dimensionality and Units for the expression.
• Key in the name of the expression in the Name field and press the
<Enter> key.
• Key in the formula for the expression in the Formula field and press the
<Enter> key.
• Choose Apply or OK to save the expression.
After keying in the name of the expression the <Tab> or = key can be
used to advance the cursor to the Formula field.
Editing Expressions 6
Procedure:
• Display the Expressions dialog with More Options.
• Choose the expression to modify from the expression list. The expression
will be displayed in the Name and Formula fields.
• Modify the Name, Formula, or Units of the expression.
• Press the <Enter> key or the Accept Edit icon.
• Choose Apply or OK to save the expression.
Editing the name of an expression will also edit the formula of any
expression that references it.

Expressions
Listing Expressions Associated with Features
It is often necessary to determine which expressions control which features in

a model. If the Listed Expressions option is set to All, all of the expressions
in the part are listed. If an expression defines a feature, the feature name is
listed with it (i.e. p8 (Simple Hole(5) Diameter).
All of the expressions associated with a feature may also be listed in an
Information window by choosing Information→Feature and selecting the
feature or MB3→Information in the Part Navigator.
List Referencers
The List Referencers option provides a means of finding out if an expression

is referenced in another expression and what feature(s) use the expression.
To use this option, select the expression, and choose List Referencers from
the MB3 pop-up menu.

Expressions
Specifying Formulas while Creating Features
The Expressions dialog may be accessed while creating a feature by choosing

Formula from the parameter entry option menu. This will allow you to
specify a complex formula for the expression that is generated for the
feature parameter. Parameter entry options are available with many of the
parameter entry fields throughout the Modeling application.

Expressions
Activity — Getting Familiar with Expressions

In this activity, you will create user-defined expressions.
Step 1: Open the expression_1 part.
Step 3: Examine the Expressions of the Block.

Choose Tools→Expression.
Change the Listed Expressions option to All.
The dialog lists all of the expressions in the part. Notice the
default expression names p0, p1, and p2 which define the block.
Step 4: Delete the Block.
Choose the Delete icon from the Standard toolbar.

(Edit→Delete)
Select the block in the graphics window and choose OK .

Expressions
Step 5: Create a new Block.

Choose Insert→Design Feature→Block.
Choose Origin, Edge Lengths.
Key in the following expressions:

Length (XC) = length=8
Width (YC) = width=6
Height (ZC) = height=6/2
Choose OK.
Step 6: Examine the Expressions for the newly created Block.

Notice the expressions height, length, and width. These
expressions are referenced in the formulas of the expressions
defining the block.

Expressions
Change the Listed Expressions option to Named.
This lists only the expressions in the part that you explicitly
named.
The formula for height is a constant numeric value 6/2. The
desired design intent is that the height grows proportionally
with the width. This relationship could not be established upon
creation as the width expression was not in existence.
Step 7: Edit the expression.

Select the height expression from the Expressions list. This
will fill in the Name and Formula fields.
6

Expressions
Key in a new formula for the expression width/2 and press

Enter.
The formula for the expression height is now changed to

width/2. Any time that the width changes, the height value
will change accordingly.
Step 8: Change the width value.

Select the width expression.
Key in 4 for the formula and press Enter.
Choose OK.
The block will update with the new width and height.
6

Expressions
Summary
Expressions are algebraic or arithmetic statements used to control the
characteristics of a part. All expressions have a name, a formula, and a value
and are used to define the dimensions and relationships of a model.
In this lesson you:
• Created Expressions.
• Edited Expressions.

Lesson
7 Shell
Purpose
This lesson introduces the Shell feature operation.
Objectives

• Create a Shell feature.
• Specify faces to be removed and apply an alternate thickness to a face.

Shell
Shell Feature Overview

The Shell feature operation provides additional definition to an existing solid
by creating a cavity inside the solid or a shell around the solid based upon a
specified thickness. This can be accessed in the Feature Operation toolbar or
by choosing Insert→Offset/Scale→Shell.
The entire solid body is hollowed during this operation but faces can be
removed to create openings. In the following example, the top face was
selected to be removed.

Shell
Creating a Shell Feature

When you choose the Shell option, the Shell dialog is displayed.
The Remove Faces icon is initially active by default and you are prompted to
select the faces to remove. You may also enter a Thickness value.
After the selecting faces to remove, the resulting solid previews in the
graphics window. The Thickness can be adjusted by dragging the handle (1)
to the desired value or keying in the value in the dynamic input field (2).
7

Shell
Initially, the drag handle will point inward and a positive value for thickness
will hollow the original solid. To reverse the direction, double click the drag
handle (or use MB3). When the drag handle points outward, a positive
thickness value will create a shell around the original solid.
You may also specify a negative thickness value to create the shell
in the opposite direction of the drag handle.
When you achieve the desired Thickness value and direction , choose OK (or
MB2) to create the feature.
Selection Intent Face Options
The Selection Intent toolbar is available to specify face selection rules while
selecting faces. These rules can be applied to automatically select a collection
of faces in a single step instead of selecting each one individually.
Alternate Thickness List
7 A unique thickness may be assigned to faces with the Alternate Thickness

List option. This option allows you to select sets of faces and specify a
different thickness value using a drag handle or entry field.

Shell
Activity — Creating a Shell Feature
In this activity, you will use the Shell feature to define a plastic molded part.
Step 1: Open the shell_hair_dryer part.
Step 3: Inspect the Part.

7
Set the Rendering Style to Shaded with Edges and
rotate the part to verify that a shell feature is required.
Step 4: Create the shell feature and remove the proper faces.
Choose the Shell icon from the Feature Operation

toolbar. (Insert→Offset/Scale→Shell)

Shell
Key in a Thickness value of 2.
Select the right (1), and back (2) planar faces to remove.

Shell
Choose OK (MB2).
Step 5: Rotate the part to verify the shell was created correctly.

Shell
Activity — Creating a Shell and Removing Multiple Faces
In this activity, you will create a Shell feature and select multiple faces to
remove.
Step 1: Open the shell_face_selection part.
7 Step 3: Create a shell feature.
Choose the Shell icon. (Insert→Offset/Scale→Shell)
Key in a Thickness of .12.
Select the following five faces to remove: front, back, left, right,
and bottom.

Shell
Choose OK. (MB2)
Step 4: Edit the Shell feature.

Orient the work view to Front. (MB3→Orient View→Front)
Fit the view. (MB3→Fit)
Choose Edit→Feature→Edit Parameters.
Choose the Shell feature and OK.
Change the Thickness to –.12 and choose OK twice (or MB2 7

twice) to update the model.
Notice the material is offset in the opposite direction.

Shell
Activity — Creating a Shell with an Alternate Thickness

In this activity, you will create a Shell feature with an alternate thickness
applied to a face.
Step 1: Open the shell_alternate_thickness part.
Step 3: Create the shell feature.
Choose the Shell icon. (Insert→Offset/Scale→Shell)
Key in a Thickness of 4.
Verify the Face option is set to Tangent Faces in the Selection

Intent toolbar.
Select the top face to remove.

This will automatically include the right and left faces because
they are tangent.
Choose Alternate Thickness List.

Shell
Select the bottom face.
Key in a Set1 T value of 8.
Choose OK twice. (or MB2 twice)

Shell
Summary
The Shell feature creates a cavity inside, or a shell around an existing solid,
based upon a specified thickness. In addition, selected faces may be assigned
alternate thicknesses.
In this lesson you:
• Created a Shell feature with a uniform thickness.
• Created a Shell feature and selected multiple faces to remove.
• Created a Shell feature and specified an alternate thickness for a face.

Lesson
8 Edge Operations
Purpose
This lesson introduces Edge Blend and Chamfer operations.
Objectives

• Create Edge Blends.
• Create Chamfers.

Edge Operations
Overview
Edge operations are available to provide additional definition to the edges of a
model. These operations include Edge Blend and Chamfer. They are available
in the Feature Operation toolbar or by choosing Insert→Detail Feature.
You may also create edge blends and chamfers by first selecting the
edge(s) and choosing Blend or Chamfer from the MB3 pop-up menu.

Edge Operations
Edge Blend
This option creates cylindrical or conical faces in place of an edge on a solid
body. Material is added or subtracted depending on the topology of the solid
body and the faces intersecting the selected edges (1,2) are shortened.
Creating Edge Blends
After choosing the Edge Blend option, a dialog is displayed and you are
prompted to select a set of edges. You can key in the radius in the Set1 R field.

Edge Operations
After the selecting edges, the result is previewed in the graphics window. The
radius value can be adjusted by dragging one of the radius drag handles (1) or
by keying in the value in the dynamic input field (2).
Choose OK, Apply, or MB2 twice to create the edge blend feature.

Edge Operations
Multiple Edge Sets

A single blend feature may consist of one or more sets of edges and each set
may have a different radius value. After the first set of edges is selected and
a radius is specified, choose the Complete set and start next set icon in the
dialog (or MB2 once) to select another set of edges.
The drag handles for the first edge set disappear and an anchor and label
(Set1) are displayed. You may then select edges to include in the second edge
set (Set2) and specify the radius using the new drag handles or dynamic
input field.
You may continue to define another edge set or complete the blend operation
by choosing OK (or MB2 twice).
Selection Intent
The Selection Intent toolbar is available while creating an edge blend to
specify edge selection rules. These rules can be applied to automatically select
a collection of edges in a single step instead of selecting each edge individually.
8

Edge Operations
Activity — Creating Edge Blends
In this activity, you will create Edge Blends.
Step 1: Open the edge_blend_1 part.
Step 3: Create the first Edge Blend.

Select the edge (1), click MB3, and choose the Blend option
from the pop-up menu.

Edge Operations
Key in .75 for the radius and press Enter (or use the drag
handles).
Choose OK (or MB2 twice) to create the blend.
Step 4: Create the second Edge Blend.
Choose the Edge Blend icon.

(Insert→Detail Feature→Edge Blend)
In the Selection Intent toolbar, verify the Curve option is set to

Tangent Curves.

Edge Operations
Select the edge (1) shown below.
Notice the tangent edges are automatically selected based on

the Add Tangent Chain selection rule.
Key in a radius of .5 (or use the drag handles).
8 If you were to choose OK now, only the three tangent edges

would be blended. Instead, you will blend the entire left side of
the part so the additional edges must be selected manually.

Edge Operations
Select the two additional edges on the left side of the part
shown below.
Choose OK (or MB2 twice) to create the blend.

Edge Operations
Chamfer
This option bevels the edges of a solid body by defining the desired chamfer
dimensions.
Material is added or subtracted depending on the topology of the solid body
and the faces intersecting the selected edges (1,2) are shortened.

Edge Operations
Creating Chamfers
The Chamfer dialog is displayed and you are prompted to select the edges to
chamfer. You can specify an Input Option and offset values in the dialog.
After edges are selected, you can also use the drag handles or dynamic entry
fields in the graphics window to specify the offsets.
Choose OK (or MB2 ) to create the chamfer.

Edge Operations
Chamfer Input Options
The same offset value (1) is measured along

both adjacent faces.
Symmetric Offsets
Different offsets (1, 2) are measured along

the adjacent faces.
Asymmetric Offsets
An Offset value (1) and an Angle (2) are

required.
Offset and Angle
You can change the Input Option in the dialog or by highlighting the
drag handle in the graphics window with the cursor and choosing
8 MB3.

Edge Operations
Activity — Creating Chamfers
In this activity, you will apply chamfers to the edges of a model.
Step 1: Open the chamfer_1 part.
Step 3: Create a chamfer by specifying an offset and angle.
Choose the Chamfer icon.

(Insert→Detail Feature→Chamfer)
Choose Offset and Angle in the Chamfer dialog.
Offset = 1.75
Angle = 30
8

Edge Operations
Select the edge (1).
If your model does not look like the figure below, choose the
Reverse Offsets icon in the Chamfer dialog.
Choose Apply.
Step 4: Create a chamfer with asymmetric offsets.

Choose the Asymmetric Offsets icon in the Chamfer dialog.

8 First Offset = .25
Second Offset = .5

Edge Operations
Select the edge (2).
If your model does not look like the figure below, choose the
Reverse Offsets icon.
Choose OK.

Edge Operations
Summary
The Edge Blend and Chamfer operations are available to provide additional
definition to the edges of a model. All of the blended edges or chamfered edges
created in a single operation are considered to be one feature.
In this lesson you:
• Blended a single edge.
• Blended edges using a selection intent rule.
• Chamfered edges using different input options.

Lesson
9 Model Construction Query
Purpose
This lesson demonstrates different methods to query a part to determine

creation method, design intent, and physical properties.
Objectives

• Retrieve layer information.
• Access the Part Navigator.
• Access feature and expression information.
• Playback the model construction.
• Suppress and Unsuppress features.
• Identify where expressions are used.
• Measure the distance between objects.
• Assign a material and calculate mass properties.

Model Construction Query
Visually Inspect the Part

Visual inspection of the solid model may be accomplished by rotating the
model to view the different features. At times this is very beneficial in order
to clearly see what is displayed in the graphics window. The model may be
rotated by using the middle mouse button or the Rotate icon in the View
toolbar.
Different rendering styles are available in the MB3 pop-up menu or View
toolbar to display the part. You can choose from Shaded or Wireframe modes,
with or without edges displayed.

Layers
Layers are used to organize a part. They work like invisible containers to
house the different objects used to create an NX solid model. A layer is a
system-defined attribute that all objects must have.
There are 256 layers in NX, one of which is always the Work Layer. Any of
the layers can be assigned to one of four classifications of status:
• Work
• Selectable (on)
• Visible Only
• Invisible (off)
The Work Layer is the layer that objects are created on and is always visible
and selectable while it remains the Work Layer. Layer 1 is the default Work
Layer when a new part is created. When the Work Layer is changed, the
previous Work Layer automatically becomes Selectable and could then be
assigned a different status.
The number of objects on one layer is not limited. You may choose which
layers to create objects on and what the status will be. However, employing
company standards for the use of layers is recommended.

To assign a status to a layer or layers, choose the Layer Settings icon from the
Utility toolbar or choose Format→Layer Settings from the menu bar.
Select a layer from the Layer/Status list area and choose one of the four
options below the list (Selectable, Invisible, Make Work, or Visible Only).
Double-clicking on a layer (other than the work layer) toggles it
9 between Selectable and Invisible.

Things to look for in the Layer Settings dialog:

• Object Count — Enabling Show Object Count using the checkbox
will change the display in the Layer/Status listing window to a
Layer/Status/Count listing window that shows the number of objects
contained on each layer.
• Category Names — Layers or groups of layers can be named using

Categories. These names are listed in the Category listing window on the
Layer Settings dialog as well as in the Layer/Status listing window next
to assigned layers when Show Category Names is enabled.
• Layer Listing — The filtering option menu at the bottom of the dialog
allows the Layer/Status listing window to display All Layers, Layers with
Objects, or All Selectable Layers.

Layer Categories
The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.
Model Geometry
Object Geometry Layer Assignment Category Name

Solid Geometry 1–20 SOLIDS
Inter-part Modeling 15–20 LINKED_OBJECTS
Sketch Geometry 21–40 SKETCHES
Curve Geometry 41–60 CURVES
Reference Geometry 61–80 DATUMS
Sheet Bodies 81–100 SHEETS
Drafting Objects

Drawing Borders 101–110 FORMATS
Engineering Disciplines

Mechanism Tools 121–130 MECH
Finite Element Meshes 131–150 CAE
and Engineering Tools
Manufacturing 151–180 MFG
Quality Tools 181–190 QA

Moving Objects Between Layers
While creating a model, it may be necessary to move an object to a different

layer. This can be accomplished by choosing Format→Move to Layer. The
objects which need to be moved are selected using the Class Selection menu
and the Layer Move dialog appears.
The destination layer may be specified by keying it in the Destination Layer

or Category field or by selecting it from the layer list. Choosing OK or Apply
will move the object(s). If Apply is chosen, additional objects may be selected
to move by choosing the Select New Objects button.

Part Navigator
The Part Navigator is useful to identify the features of the model. Selecting
a feature in the Part Navigator window will highlight that feature in the
graphics window and will also highlight its parent and/or child features in
the Part Navigator. Conversely, selecting a feature in the graphics window
will highlight that feature and its parents/children in the Part Navigator.
To access the Part Navigator, choose the Part Navigator icon on the resource
bar located vertically to the right of the graphics window.
If the resource is bar is not visible, choose View→Show Resource

Bar to turn it on.
Suppress and Unsuppress
The display of features can be temporarily removed (suppressed) from the

graphics window by selecting the check box next to the feature name. When a
check is present, the feature is displayed in the graphics window.
The Suppress and Unsuppress options are also in the MB3 pop-up menu of
the Part Navigator, the Edit→Feature menu, and the Edit Feature toolbar.
They can be used to help investigate how a model was created and how it
would be affected if the feature was removed.
Feature Playback
The Playback option (Edit→Feature→Playback) can also be used to

investigate a model. It temporarily hides features and allows you to step
9 through the construction of the model, one feature at a time.
Playback does not suppress reference features or sketches. It does allow
editing of features during the update.

Information
The Information pull-down menu offers a number of options to obtain
information about the model.
Information→Feature
This provides another interface to identify Parent/Child relationships

between the selected feature and the other features in the model. In addition,
expressions that control the feature may be displayed in the graphics window
by toggling on the Display Dimensions option. Choosing OK or Apply will
display the Information window with the geometric data and associated
expressions.
Feature information may also be accessed by selecting the feature in
the Part Navigator and choosing MB3→Information or, by selecting
the feature in the graphics window and choosing MB3→Properties.
Information→Object
This is used to display information about selected objects in an Information

window. Any type of geometric object may be selected including curves, edges,
faces, and bodies. The Information window will display information such as
name, layer, color, object type, and geometric properties (length, diameter,
start and end coordinates, etc.).
Information→Expression→List All
This lists all expressions in the part in the Information window. From the
Information window, the list can be printed or saved to a text file.
Information→Expression→List All by Reference
This is used to identify expressions that reference other expressions and the
features that they define. The Edit→Find option within the Information
window can be used to search for a specific expression.

Referenced Expressions
If an expression defines a feature directly, the feature name is listed with it in

the Expressions dialog. However, an expression may also be included in the
formula of other expressions. The referencing expressions and features may
be identified by using the List References option in the Expressions dialog.
To use this option:
• Choose Tools→Expression.
• If necessary, change the Listed Expressions filter to list the expression to

interrogate.
• Select the expression and choose List References in the MB3 pop-up menu.
An Information window will list the features and other expressions that
are referencing the selected expression.

Distance
This Distance option is used to obtain the minimum distance between any
two objects such as points, curves, planes, bodies, edges, and/or faces.
This can be accessed by choosing Analysis→Distance or the Distance icon
in the Analysis toolbar. An icon option bar appears in the upper left corner
of the graphics window with options to select the first point or object (1) and
the second point or object (2).
After selecting the two objects, a temporary ruler and measurement result
are displayed in the graphics window. The resulting units for the distance
are determined by the setting in Analysis→Units.
Choosing the Information option will display the results in an Information 9

window along with the closest points on each object and the delta distances
relative to the absolute and work coordinate systems.

Mass Properties
Basic mass properties data can be calculated by choosing
Analysis→Mass Properties and selecting the solid body.
The units for the results are determined by the setting in Analysis→Units.
A density may be assigned to the solid body by

choosing Edit→Feature→Solid Density or by choosing
Tools→Material Properties and creating a new material or selecting a
material from the existing library.

Activity — Model Construction Query

In this activity, you will identify feature relationships and design intent.
Although detailed instructions are provided, it may be beneficial to attempt
to navigate through the interface without using them.
Step 1: Open the inspect_arm_1 part.
Step 3: Visually inspect the model.
Choose the Shaded with Edges icon.

(MB3→Rendering Style→Shaded with Edges)
Rotate the model (MB2).
Choose the Trimetric icon to orient the view back to the

trimetric orientation. (MB3→Orient View→Trimetric)
Step 4: Inspect the layers.

Viewing the layers may help gain an understanding of the
complexity of the model. If there is only one object on a “solids”
layer and several objects on a “sketches” layer, the model is likely
an extrusion.
Choose the Layer Settings icon. 9

(Format→Layer Settings)
Verify the Show Object Count option is turned on.
Turn the Show Category Names option on.

Review the listing for category names and object count.

Notice that there are objects on a SOLIDS layer, a SKETCHES
layer, and a DATUMS layer.
Choose the Static Wireframe icon to better view interior

features. (MB3→Rendering Style→Static Wireframe)
Make layers 21 and 61 selectable so that the construction

geometry may be seen.
Choose OK in the Layer Settings dialog.
Choose the Fit icon. (MB3→Fit)
Step 5: Identify the features using the Part Navigator.
Choose the Part Navigator icon from the resource bar on

the right side of the graphics window.
Choose the push pin icon in the upper right corner of

the Part Navigator to permanently display it. If the graphics
9 window is maximized, the display will be adjusted to fit the
part within the viewing area.

Choose Tools→Part Navigator and ensure the Timestamp

Order option is turned on. This will list all features in the
Model History tree of the Part Navigator.
Select Extrude(5) “large knuckle extrusion” in the Part

Navigator Model History.
The corresponding feature will be highlighted in the graphics
window. The parent feature (Sketch(3) “S21”) and child (Simple
Hole(7) “large thru hole”) will highlight in the Part Navigator.
Select a few other features in the Part Navigator to identify

them and their parent/child relationships.
Step 6: Review the model construction using Playback.

Choose Edit→Feature→Playback.
All of the solid features are suppressed except the reference
features and the sketch. The Edit During Update dialog
informs you that the Fixed Datum Plane(0) feature has been
updated, this is the first feature in the model history.
9 Choose the Step option.

The next feature, Fixed Datum Axis(1), is updated. You may
have to move the slider to read the entire message displayed in
the Edit During Update dialog.

Choose the Step option again.

The next feature (Fixed Datum Axis(2)) is updated.
Continue to Step through the model until all features have

been updated.
Step 7: Review the model construction using Suppress and Unsuppress.

Starting at the top of the Part Navigator Model History list,
select the check box in front of the first feature (Fixed Datum
Plane(0)) to suppress it.
Notice that many of the other features are also suppressed.
This is because all of the features except for the two fixed
datum axes are children of the suppressed datum plane.
Select Fixed_Datum_Plane(0) in the Part Navigator.
Choose the Dependencies option at the bottom of the Part

Navigator

In the Dependencies area, expand SKETCH(3) ”S21”.

Now you can see how the various features are dependent on
the datum plane.
Choose the Dependencies option to close the area.
Starting at the top of the Part Navigator Model History list,

select the "empty" checkbox in front of the first feature with
MB1 to unsuppress the feature.
Continue down the list and unsuppress the remaining features,

one at a time, by selecting each of the empty check boxes with
MB1.
Step 8: Find the values that control the thickness of the web extrusion.
In the Part Navigator, place the cursor on
Extrude(4) “web extrusion”, press MB3, and choose
Information.
Scroll through the Information window to see the parameters

and controlling expressions.
The expression p4 is identified as the Both Side Distance.
This expression controls the start and end distances from the
section geometry for the extrusion. A value of .125 on both
sides produces a web thickness of .25.
Note that the parent of this feature is the sketch S21:Sketch(3).

9 Step 9: Identify the expression that controls the distance from the large
hole center to the small hole center.
Since the web feature was generated from the sketch geometry, the
obvious place to look for the expression that controls the hole to
hole distance is in the sketch.

In the Part Navigator, place the cursor on Sketch(3) “S21”,

press MB3, and choose Edit Parameters.
Orient the view to the Front using the View toolbar.
The expression in question can clearly be identified as

arm_length=8.500.
Orient the view back to the Trimetric orientation.
Choose Cancel in the Edit Sketch Dimensions dialog.
Step 10: Close the Part Navigator.
Select the push pin icon again and drag the cursor off the
Part Navigator to hide it.
Step 11: Determine how the large thru hole is positioned.

You will select a feature directly from the graphics window rather
than from a list which will take less time if you do not know the
name of the feature.
Choose Information→Feature.
Select the Large Thru Hole feature in the graphics window and
accept it if necessary. You can zoom, pan or rotate the part to
get a better view of the feature.
Turn the Display Dimensions option on in the Feature

Browser dialog.
9
The diameter and positioning dimension appear in the graphics
window.

Choose OK. (MB2)

The Information window appears and shows that p18 is a
parallel positioning dimension with a value of 0 (zero). The
logical assumption can be made that the hole is located Point
to Point relative to the Large Knuckle extrusion.
Step 12: Identify where an expression is referenced.

Change the Listed Expressions filter to Named.
Select the small_dia expression.

This expression is listed as defining
(S21:Sketch(3) Diameter Dimension on Arc2)
Choose MB3→List References.

The Information window appears and also shows that another
expression is referencing it (large_dia=2.5*small_dia).
Cancel the Expressions dialog.
Step 13: Identify the arc in the sketch that is referencing the expression.
Choose Information→Feature.
Select S21:Sketch(3).

Choose the Object Dependency Browser option.

The child objects of the sketch are listed. Notice that Arc2 is
present.
Select Arc - Arc2.

The arc is highlighted in the graphics window. The feature and
object associated with the expression have now been identified.
Cancel the Object Dependency Browser dialog.
Step 14: Measure a distance.
Choose the Layer Settings icon.

Make layers 21 and 61 invisible and choose OK.

9
Choose the Distance icon in the Analysis toolbar.
(Analysis→Distance)

For the first object, select one of the upper edges of the web.
For the second object, select one of the lower edges of the web.
The shortest distance between the edges is displayed.
Step 15: Assign a material to the solid body.

Choose Tools→Material Properties.
Select the solid body in the graphics window.
Choose Library in the Materials dialog.
Choose OK to accept the default search criteria. (MB2)
Choose Steel and OK.

9 Choose OK in the Materials dialog. (MB2)
Step 16: Determine the mass properties of the solid body in units of
kilograms and meters.
Choose Analysis→Units→kg -m

Choose Analysis→Mass Properties.
Select the solid body.

Individual mass properties may be selected from the list in
the graphics window or all of the properties may be listed in
an Information window.
Choose the Information icon in the upper left corner of

the graphics window.
Step 17: Choose File→Close→All Parts.

Summary
In this lesson, you queried a model to determine the creation method and
design intent. These skills are important to review parts created by other
users.
In this lesson you:
• Accessed the Part Navigator.
• Examined layer settings.
• Identified expressions.
• Reviewed the model construction using Playback, Suppress, and

Unsuppress.
• Measured a distance.
• Calculated mass properties.

Lesson
10 Introduction to Assemblies
Purpose
This lesson introduces the Assembly application.
Objectives

• Set Load Options.
• Work with the Assembly Navigator.
10
Introduction to Assemblies
Definitions and Descriptions
Assembly
An assembly is a part which contains component objects. It is a

collection of pointers to piece parts and/or subassemblies. In the figure
below, the toy laser gun is an assembly consisting of many components.
Subassembly
A subassembly is an assembly used as a component within a higher level

assembly. The figure below shows the subassembly of the integrated circuit
board for the toy laser gun. A subassembly has components of its own.
10
Component Objects
A component object is the entity that contains the pointer that links the
assembly back to the master component part.
A component object can also be a subassembly made up of other component
parts and/or component objects.
An example of an assembly structure is shown below:
1 – Top level assembly.
2 – Subassembly. This is a component part and has been added to the
top level assembly.
3 – Piece Parts. These are component parts and have been added to the
top level assembly or subassemblies.
4 – A Component Object.
Component Parts
A component part is a part which is pointed to by a component object within

an assembly. The actual geometry is stored in the component part and is
referenced, not copied, by the assembly.
The term “piece part” is used to refer to master geometry as it exists outside
of an assembly.
10
Introduction to Load Options

When an assembly part is opened (loaded) using File→Open, the component
parts that are referenced by the assembly must be found and loaded. The
Load Options establish how and from where the component parts are loaded.
The Load Options dialog can be accessed by choosing
File→Options→Load Options or by choosing the Options button
in the Open Part File dialog.
1 — Determines where to look

for component parts.
2 — Determines which
components will be loaded.
3 — Controls whether
components are fully or
partially loaded.
4 — Controls what to do if a
component is not found.
10
Load Method
The Load Method determines where to search for the component parts when
an assembly is opened. There are three possible settings.
• As Saved — looks for each component part in the same directory it was in
when the assembly was last saved.
• From Directory — looks for each component in the same directory as the
assembly part.
• Search Directories — looks for each component in directories specified

in a user-defined list.
10
Load States
The Load Options also control whether component parts will be fully loaded,
partially loaded, or unloaded when an assembly is opened. These are referred
to as Load States.
Fully Loaded
A part is fully loaded if all of its data is loaded into system memory.
All components can be fully loaded by changing the Load Components option
to All Components and toggling off the Use Partial Loading option before
opening the assembly.
Partially Loaded
When a part is partially loaded, only the data required to display the part is
loaded into memory. Components will be partially loaded if the Use Partial
Loading option is turned on when the assembly is opened.
Partially loading components reduces the memory requirements and improves
performance. This is beneficial when working with large assemblies.
Unloaded
A component part is unloaded if it is not loaded when the assembly is opened.

Component parts may be refrained from loading by changing the Load
Components option to No Components before opening the assembly. This
will drastically reduce the amount of memory required and improve system
performance but the component geometry will not be visible.
Individual components or subassemblies may be opened at a later time when
they are needed.
10
Load Failure
The Abort Load on Failure option specifies what to do if a component part

is not found, based on the current load method.
• When turned on, no parts are loaded unless all of the components are
found. The first component that cannot be found will be listed in an error
window.
• When turned off, the assembly is loaded along with any of the components
that are found. Those components that are not found will be listed in a
warning window and left unloaded.
10
Activity — Setting Load Options
In this activity, you will set load options to control how assembly components
are opened.
Step 1: Set the Load Options to As Saved.
Choose File→Options→Load Options.
Verify the Load Method is set to As Saved.
Verify Abort Load on Failure is turned on.
Choose OK.
Step 2: Open the test assembly.
Open the laser_test_assm_1 part.

A warning appears informing you that a component could not
be found.
The system is trying to locate each component in the directory
in which it resided when the assembly was last saved. The
components may have been moved to a new directory or the
original directory may no longer exist. The warning would also
occur if you did not have read access to the original directory.
Choose OK to dismiss the warning.
Choose Options in the Open Part File dialog.
Set the Load Method to From Directory.
Choose OK.
Open the laser_test_assm_1 part.
10
If a warning appears informing you that the parts are read

only, choose OK to dismiss the warning.
Step 3: Review the list of components in the assembly.

Choose Assemblies→Reports→List Components.
Scroll through the Information window and confirm that all of
the component parts are located in the same directory as the
assembly part.
Step 4: Do not close any parts. You will use the assembly in the next
activity.
10
The Assembly Navigator

The Assembly Navigator provides a graphical display of the structure of the
displayed assembly and provides a quick and easy method of manipulating
components in the assembly.
The Assembly Navigator may be accessed by choosing the Assembly
Navigator icon from the resource bar on the right side of the graphics window.
You may re-size the Assembly Navigator window and use the scroll
bars to see the entire tree structure and all of the columns.
10
Node Display
Each component of an assembly is displayed as a node in the assembly tree

structure. If you select on a node with MB1, the system will highlight the
component geometry in the graphics window.
Each node consists of a check box, an icon, the part name, and additional
columns. If the part is an assembly or subassembly, an expand/collapse box
will also be present.
Components may be selected for various operations by choosing the

appropriate node in the Assembly Navigator with MB1.
Icons
Assembly (or subassembly) — If the icon is yellow, the assembly is

within the work part. If the icon is gray with solid edges, the assembly is a
non-work part. If the icon is gray with dashed edges, the assembly is closed.
Component Piece Part — If the icon is yellow, the component is within

the work part. If the icon is gray with solid edges, the component is a
non-work part. If the icon is gray with dashed edges, the component is closed.
Expand/Collapse Box — Children of a node are only displayed when it

is expanded. To expand or collapse the node, place the cursor over the box
and click MB1. When a node is collapsed, the expand/collapse box is marked
with a +. An expanded node is marked with a — .
Check Boxes
The check box provides a quick means of determining a part’s status. A check
box also lets you load and show a part with a single action.
No check — The part is closed. Clicking on this type of check box:
• Loads the component and its children partially or fully, depending on the
load options. Unloaded parents may also be loaded at this time.
• Any components that were blanked are now unblanked.
• Afterwards, the check boxes of the part and its children will contain red
check marks except for those which fail to load, are excluded from a
reference set, or reside on invisible layers. 10
Gray check — The part is blanked, and at least partially open. It also
appears for unblanked parts which either have an excluded reference set or
are on invisible layers. Clicking on this type of check box:
• Unblanks the component, along with any of its children that were blanked.
• If any of its children were unloaded, they are now loaded.
• Afterwards, the check boxes of the part and its children have large red
checks, except for those whose loading failed, who have an excluded
reference set, or are on invisible layers.
Red check — The part is unblanked, at least partially open, in a visible

reference set, and on a visible layer. Clicking on this type of check box:
• Blanks the component and its unblanked children.
• Afterwards, the component’s check box has a gray check and its children
have gray checks (if blanked) or no checks (if unloaded).
You cannot close a part by clicking on its check box. To close a part, use the
File→Close option or the Close option in the Assembly Navigator pop-up
menu.
10
Activity — Working with the Assembly Navigator
In this activity, you will work with the Assembly Navigator.

Continue working with the laser_test_assm_1 assembly.
Step 1: Review the nodes in the Assembly Navigator.
Choose the Assembly Navigator icon from the resource bar on

the right side of the graphics window.
If the resource is bar is not visible, choose View→Show

Resource Bar to turn it on.
Expand the laser_ic_board_13 node by clicking on the + sign.
Step 2: Blank and Unblank a component node.
Click MB1 on one of the laser_ic9_13 nodes.

Notice the component highlights on the screen.
Click the check box in front of the highlighted node.

Notice the component is blanked.
Click on the check box again to unblank the component.
Step 3: Blank and Unblank a subassembly node. 10

Click the check box in front of the subassembly

laser_ic_board_13.
Notice the subassembly and all of its components are blanked.
Also notice the color of the check marks become gray.
Click on the subassembly check box again to unblank the

subassembly.
Step 4: Close a component.

Choose File→Close→Selected Parts.
Choose All Parts in Session at the top of the Close Parts dialog.
Select laser_ic9_13 from the list and choose OK.

In the Assembly Navigator, the laser_ic9_13 nodes no longer
have check marks in their boxes and the components are
not displayed in the graphics window. This means that the
components are not loaded.
Step 5: Open the components using the check box.

In the Assembly Navigator, click on the check box in front of
either laser_ic9_13 nodes.
Both occurrences of the laser_ic9_13 component are now open
and are once again displayed in the graphics window.
Step 6: Do not close or save the part. You will use this assembly in the
next activity.
10
Selecting Components in the Assembly Navigator
In many assembly functions, components may be selected from a list in a

dialog or from the graphics window. You may also select components using
the Assembly Navigator by choosing the appropriate node with MB1. You can
select single or multiple components.
To select multiple components in the Assembly Navigator, select the first
component and then either:
• Use <Shift>MB1 (together) on another component to select all the
components between those components
• Or use <Ctrl>MB1 on another component if you want only it and the

first component
You can also use <Shift>MB1 on components in the graphics window or

<Ctrl>MB1 on components in the Assembly Navigator to deselect them.
Identifying Components
In the Assembly Navigator, if you click MB1 while the cursor is over a
non-work part whose check box has a red check, that part is highlighted. The
part remains highlighted until you select another part. (Hovering the cursor
without clicking MB1 has no effect.)
Check boxes of components that are not visible will have a thin gray check
or no check.
If you hover the cursor over a part that is not visible (e.g., blanked, on
another layer, or unloaded), a box defining the boundaries of the component
appears in the graphics window. The box disappears when you move the
cursor to another part. This only occurs when the Preselect Invisible Nodes
property is turned on.
The Preselect Invisible Nodes property is accessed by clicking MB3
in the Assembly Navigator away from the component nodes and
choosing Properties from the pop-up menu.
Because of configuration differences, you may have to hold MB1 down

for a few seconds before the box displays. In some cases, the box may
not be drawn until you release MB1. Also, the box will not be drawn
if you double-click MB1.
10
Selecting Components in the Graphics Window
The QuickPick dialog may be used to control the selection of components or

objects within a component.
Once a component has been highlighted in the graphics window, the MB3
pop-up menu may be used to choose an available action for that component.
The cursor must be on top of the component for the component-specific pop-up
menu to appear.
The options available in the component pop-up menu will vary

depending on whether the Assemblies and Modeling applications
are on.
10
Designing in Context
Designing in Context is the ability to directly edit component geometry as

it is displayed in the assembly. Geometry from other components can be
selected to aid in the modeling.
The Displayed Part
NX allows multiple parts to be open at the same time. This can occur either
implicitly, as a result of being referenced by a loaded assembly, or explicitly,
when you use File→Open. The part that is currently displayed in the graphics
window, whether it be an assembly or component, is called the Displayed Part.
There are several ways to change the displayed part:
• Select the component from the graphics window and use the MB3 pop-up
menu.
• Choose the Make Displayed Part icon in the Assemblies toolbar.
• Choose Window→More (Change Window dialog).
• Choose Window and selecting a part from the Loaded Part List, which
contains up to the last ten loaded parts.
• Use the Assembly Navigator pop-up menu.
• Choose Assemblies→Context Control→Set Displayed Part.
10
Window
Choosing Window→More will display the Change Window dialog which lists
all partially and fully loaded parts other than the current displayed part.
When this dialog is active, a part may be selected by:

• Choosing it from the list of loaded parts. You may enter a portion of the
part name in the Search Text field to help find the part in the list. The
Options button can be used to specify how to perform the search.
• Selecting geometry in the graphics window (if the current displayed part
is an assembly).
• Selecting the node in the Assembly Navigator.
10
The Work Part

The part in which geometry is created and edited is defined as the Work Part.
The Work Part may be the displayed part or any component part which is
contained in the displayed assembly part.
When a part is opened, it will initially be both the displayed and the work
part. The displayed part and the work part do not need to be the same. In
the case where the displayed part is not the work part, the work part will be
displayed in color and the other component parts will be de-emphasized.
There are several ways to change the work part:
• Double-click on the component in the graphics window.
• Select the component from the graphics window and use the MB3 pop-up
menu.
• Choose the Make Work Part icon in the Assemblies toolbar.
• Use the Assembly Navigator pop-up menu.
• Choose Assemblies→Context Control→Set Work Part.
10
If a component has already been selected, choosing the Make Work Part icon
will immediately make it the work part. If no component has been selected,
the Set Work Part dialog is displayed. This dialog allows you to select a
component from a list or enter a name.
Choosing the Displayed Part option changes the work part back to
the displayed assembly. This makes the displayed part and the work
part the same.
10
Assembly Navigator Pop-Up Menu Options
If you position the cursor over a node in the Assembly Navigator that
represents a component and click MB3, a pop-up menu appears.
The options available in the Assembly Navigator pop-up menu will

vary depending on the status of the component and whether the
Assemblies and Modeling applications are invoked.
Pack and Unpack
Pack removes multiple occurrences from the Assembly Navigator display and
replaces them with a single node. (Multiple occurrences are components with
the same parent, and whose prototype is the same part.) Unpack reverses
this process and shows all occurrences.
10
Make Work Part
Selects the part in which to create new geometry or edit existing geometry,
giving you the ability to design in context.
Double clicking on a node in the Assembly Navigator will also make
that component the Work Part. In addition the reference set is
changed to Entire Part. When the component is no longer the work
part, the reference set is returned to its original condition.
Make Displayed Part
Switches the display between currently loaded parts. The displayed part
becomes the top node in the Assembly Navigator.
Display Parent
Switches the displayed part from a component or an assembly to one of its

parent assemblies.
The Maintain option in the Assembly Preferences dialog
(Preferences→Assemblies) determines the work part when a parent
becomes the displayed part. If Maintain is turned on, the component
will remain the work part. If Maintain is turned off, the parent
becomes the displayed part and work part.
10
Activity — Working with the Assembly Navigator (continued)
In this activity, you will use the Assembly Navigator to navigate through
the assembly structure.
Continue working with the laser_test_assm_1 assembly.
Step 1: Review the nodes in the Assembly Navigator.
If the Assembly Navigator is not visible, choose the Assembly

Navigator icon from the resource bar on the right side of the
graphics window.
Notice that there are several nodes of the same component.
Packing the nodes will make the assembly structure easier
to view.
Step 2: Pack like nodes in the Assembly Navigator.
In the Assembly Navigator, locate the laser_c1_13 nodes.
On any of the laser_c1_13 nodes, click MB3 and choose Pack.
Pack the laser_diode_13 nodes.
In the Assembly Navigator, place the cursor in an open area

below or to the left of the component nodes, click MB3 and
choose Pack All. (Tools→Assembly Navigator→Pack All)
Step 3: Make one of the laser_c1_13 components the work part.
In the Assembly Navigator, select laser_c1_13x4 with MB3

and choose Unpack.
Double-click on anyone of the laser_c1_13 nodes. 10

Choose OK to the Read Only message.

All of the components in the graphics window change to the
same color except for one of the laser_c1_13 components, which
remains in its original color. This color convention denotes
laser_c1_13 as the work part. The component may now be
edited and the design continued in the context of the assembly.
Step 4: Make laser_t1_13 the displayed part.

You may not want to work on a component in the context of the
assembly. If this is the case, you would make the component the
displayed part.
Select the component laser_t1_13 from the graphics window as

shown below.
Place your cursor over the highlighted component, press MB3

and choose Make Displayed Part.
The pop-up menu may contain additional options if the

Assemblies application is turned on.
The assembly is no longer displayed.
10
Step 5: Display the top level assembly.

In the Assembly Navigator, click MB3 on the laser_t1_13 node
and choose Display Parent→laser_test_assm_1.
The Maintain option in the Assembly Preferences dialog

(Preferences→Assemblies) determines the work part when
a parent becomes the displayed part. If Maintain is turned
on, the component will remain the work part. If Maintain
is turned off, the parent becomes the displayed part and
work part.
Step 6: Close all parts and do not save.
10
Saving the Work Part

After editing, the work part must be saved to keep the modifications. This can
be performed with the File→Save or the File→Save Work Part Only option.
File→Save
• If the work part is a piece part (lowest level component), only that part
will be saved.
• If the work part is an assembly or subassembly, all modified component

parts below it are also saved. Higher level assemblies will not be saved
even if they were modified.
File→Save Work Part Only
The Save Work Part Only option will only save the work part, even if the work
part is an assembly or subassembly.
File→Save All saves all loaded parts in the session that have been
modified regardless of the work part designation.
Open parts for which you do not have write privileges will not be
saved.
10
Summary
An assembly is a part which contains component objects. It is a collection of
pointers to piece parts and/or subassemblies.
Assemblies provides the ability to design in context.
In this lesson you:
• Set Load Options.
• Worked with the Assembly Navigator.
10
10
11
Lesson
11 Adding Components & Mating

Conditions
Purpose
This lesson demonstrates adding components to an assembly and the

associativity that may be designed between components with mating
conditions.
Objectives

• Add components to an assembly.
• Define mating conditions.
• Reposition components.

Adding Components & Mating Conditions
11
General Assembly Concepts
There are two basic ways to define an assembly structure.
• Top-Down Modeling
• Bottom-Up Modeling (Demonstrated in this course)
Top-Down Modeling
As the name suggests, an assembly is created at the top level hierarchy and
parts are filed down the hierarchy, creating subassemblies and components.
Bottom-Up Modeling
A Bottom-Up assembly modeling approach starts by creating the lowest level

piece parts that will make up the assembly. Existing component parts and
subassemblies are added to assemblies as the process moves up the assembly
level hierarchy.
In the Bottom-Up approach, component parts are created separate from
the assembly and later added to the assembly. This approach applies to
purchased parts or existing parts.
First, the pin is Then, the pin is added to the assembly as a

created in separate component.
part outside of the
assembly

11
All assemblies are automatically updated, when opened, to reflect changes
made to the component parts. For example, if a hole feature is added to the
solid in a component part, it will be seen in all occurrences of that component
in the assembly when it is opened.
Combining Both Approaches
It may be more practical for the methods to be combined. For example,

purchased or existing hardware for the assembly may be added using the
bottom-up method, new subassemblies and piece parts may be defined in a
top down mode as the design progresses, and finally existing fasteners may
be added in a bottom up mode from a standard parts library.
Designing in Context
The ability to make a component of an assembly the work part while leaving
the assembly itself as the displayed part allows the assembly to be designed
in context. All new geometry that is created is added to the work part. Edits
can be made to the features and expressions residing within the work part.
If a component exists several times in the assembly (i.e. a fastener), any
change to the component while it is the work part will affect all the other
occurrences as well.

11
Assemblies Application
The Assemblies application may be turned on and off by choosing
Start→Assemblies. Toggling on the Assemblies application displays the
Assemblies toolbar and expands the functions available in the Assemblies
pull-down menu.

11
Assemblies Pull-down Menu
Turning on the Assemblies application will expand the Assemblies pull-down

menu (1). Some assemblies functions are still available when the Assemblies
application is turned off (2).

11
Assemblies Toolbar
Turning on the Assemblies application will also display the Assemblies

toolbar.
If the Assemblies toolbar is not visible, choose Tools→Customize and turn it

on in the Toolbars page.
You can control which icons appear on this toolbar by choosing
Add or Remove Buttons→Assemblies from the Toolbar Options as shown in
a docked (1) and undocked (2) toolbar. This will list all of the available options
in the toolbar and allow you to turn on those which you want to display.

11
Adding Components to an Assembly
A component part may be added to an assembly by choosing the

Add Existing Component icon from the Assemblies toolbar or choosing
Assemblies→Components→Add Existing from the menu bar. The
Assemblies application must be turned on to access this option.
The component part to add can be specified with the Select Part dialog.
There are several ways to identify a part when the Select Part dialog is active:
• Select Choose Part File to retrieve an unopened part.
• Select a previously loaded part from the list.
• Key in the name of a previously loaded part.
• Select an existing component in the graphics window.
• Select an existing component in the Assembly Navigator.

11
After the part is identified, the Add Existing Part dialog appears. This dialog
is used to specify how the existing part will be added as a component object to
the assembly and what information will be stored with the component object.
Reference Set - Allows you to control the amount of data that is loaded from
each component and viewed in the context of the assembly.
• Default reference sets are Empty and Entire Part.
• Reference sets may be manually or automatically created.
For a "BODY" reference set to be created automatically, the Model

Reference Set Name option must be set to BODY in the customer
defaults settings. (File→Utilities→Customer Defaults and then
choose Assemblies→Site Standards)
Layer Options - Defines the layer to which the objects in the new component
will be added in the current work part.
• Work - Places all objects from the component part on the current work
layer.
• Original - Places each object from the component part on the same layer
in which it resides in the component part.
• As Specified - Places all objects from the component on the layer specified
in the Specified Layer entry field.

11
Creating a New Parent Assembly
This option lets you create a new parent assembly for your current work part.
The new parent assembly is a completely new part, which becomes the new
displayed part and work part in your session.
When you choose this option, the New Part File dialog is displayed so that
you can enter a name for the new parent. The former work part is added to
the parent assembly as a component.

11
Activity — Creating an Assembly
In this activity, you will create an assembly and add a component.
Step 1: Open the seedpart_in part and save it as ***_clevis_assm.
Step 3: Activate the Assemblies toolbar.
Make sure the Assemblies application is turned on.

(Start→Assemblies)
Step 4: Add a component to the assembly.
Choose the Add Existing Component icon from the

Assemblies toolbar. (Assemblies→Components→Add Existing)
Choose Choose Part File.
Select clevis_1 and choose OK.
Choose OK to accept the defaults in the Add Existing Part

dialog.
Choose Reset to ensure that the coordinates are set to zero.
Choose OK in the Point Constructor dialog.
Choose Cancel in the Select Part dialog.

11
Step 5: Verify the presence of the assembly and component parts.
If the Assembly Navigator is not visible, choose the Assembly
Navigator icon from the resource bar on the right side of the
graphics window.
The Assembly Navigator contains two nodes that represent the
top level assembly and the component part.

11
Mating Conditions
By applying mating conditions to components in an assembly, you establish
parametric, positional relationships between objects in the components.
These relationships are termed mating constraints.
In the example shown, if you align the cylindrical face of a bolt to the
cylindrical face of a hole in a block and then move the hole, the bolt will
automatically move with it.
A mating condition is made up of one or more mating constraints. There

are eight types of constraints.
1 — Mate 4 — Parallel 7 — Distance

2 — Align 5 — Perpendicular 8 — Tangent
3 — Angle 6 — Center
FROM / TO
When selecting objects to mate, the Cue line will be directing you to
select FROM and TO objects. The FROM object is part of the component that
is going to move to a new position. The TO object is part of the component
that is remaining in its present location.

11
Mate Constraint
When applying the Mate constraint to components using planar faces and
datum planes, the objects will be oriented so that their normals are parallel
and point in opposite directions. The components will not necessarily have
physical contact but will be coplanar. By definition, a face normal in a solid
body points away from the solid.
When mating non–planar faces (i.e. cylindrical to cylindrical, spherical to

spherical) the radii must be the same; for conical to conical faces, the taper
must be the same.

11
Align Constraint
When you apply the Align constraint to components using planar objects
(planar faces and datum planes), the objects will be oriented so that their
normals are parallel and point in the same direction. The components will
not necessarily have physical contact but will be coplanar.
When aligning non-planar faces, i.e. cylindrical to cylindrical, spherical to

spherical, or conical to conical, the radii and/or taper do not have to be the
same.
The Align constraint can also be used to position an edge or curve object of
a component with a planar object (planar face or datum plane) of another
component. A vector will be determined from the edge or curve object and
the objects will be oriented so that the vector and the planar object lie on the
same plane (same behavior as with mate constraint).
Using the CSYS Filter
The Align constraint allows existing coordinate systems to be used as

FROM/TO selection objects. When using the CSYS option, select the FROM
CSYS and then immediately select the TO CSYS. This constraint will remove
all DOFs between the two components.

11
Angle Constraint
Use the Angle constraint when you need to control specific angles between
objects of components.
The example below illustrates an angle constraint that is being applied in
conjunction with two other constraints. The two planar faces of the blocks
must always be coplanar by virtue of the Mate constraint. The pivot for the
Angle constraint is determined by the Align constraint that is applied to
the two edges.

11
Parallel Constraint
Use the Parallel constraint when you need to establish parallelism between
objects of components. Objects that have surface normals associated to them
will be oriented parallel based on those normals.
When applying the Parallel constraint to position a planar object of a
component (planar face or datum plane) with an edge or curve object of
another component; a vector will be determined from the edge or curve object.
The vector and the planar object’s normal will then become parallel.

11
Perpendicular Constraint
Use the Perpendicular constraint when you need to establish perpendicularity

between objects of components. Objects that have surface normals associated
to them will be oriented perpendicular based on those normals.
When applying the Perpendicular constraint to position a planar object of a
component, (planar faces and datum planes), with an edge or curve object of
another component; a vector will be determined from the edge or curve object,
that vector and the planar object’s normal will then become perpendicular.

11
Center Constraint
Use the Center constraint to center 1 or 2 objects of a component to 1 or 2

objects of another component.
Center Objects 1 to 1

11
Procedure
• Choose the Center constraint.
• Set the Object filter.
• Specify the number of objects to use (Center Objects 1 to 1, 1 to 2, 2

to 1, or 2 to 2).
• Select the objects as instructed in the Cue line.

11
Distance Constraint
Use the Distance constraint to define a distance between two geometric

objects. The sign (+/-) of the dimension controls which side of the object the
solution is on.

11
Tangent Constraint
Use the Tangent constraint to define a physical contact between two geometric
objects. There can be multiple solutions to a tangent constraint. To specify
which solution is desired, a help point will be computed from the pick position
on the surface and used to find a unique solution to the tangent constraint.
The following are some examples of tangent constraints:
• Point on Surface.
• Line tangent to Surface.
• Plane tangent to Sphere.
• Plane tangent to Cylinder.

11
The Mating Conditions Dialog
Mating conditions are applied from the Mating Conditions dialog and can be
accessed by choosing the Mate Component icon in the Assemblies toolbar or by
choosing Assemblies→Components→Mate Component from the menu bar.
1 — Mating Conditions Tree Listing
2 — Mating Constraint Types
3 — Selection Steps
4 — Expression Value (for Angle and Distance constraints)

11
Defining Mating Constraints
• Choose the type of constraint to apply.
• Select the Filter type (optional).
• Select an object FROM component to be mated (component you are

moving).
• Select an object on the component to mate TO (component that will

remain stationary).
• Choose Preview and then choose Apply (the dialog remains to let you
add more constraints).
or
• Choose OK to accept the constraint and dismiss the dialog.

11
Vary Constraints
The Vary Constraints option can be used to reposition the active component
in the Mating Conditions dialog. Existing mating constraints will limit the
freedom of movement. This dialog is similar to the Reposition Component
dialog. A different component can be selected and repositioned by choosing
the Select Component icon.

11
Degree of Freedom Indicators
Temporary arrows are displayed to indicate the remaining degrees of freedom.

The Show Degrees of Freedom/Remove Degrees of Freedom options in the
Mating Condition pop-up menu may be used to turn on and off the display
of these arrows.
A Mate constraint applied to the faces shown below, constrains the small
block in the direction normal to the faces. The small block is still free to
translate and rotate in the plane that the two shaded faces have in common.
Preview
The Preview option becomes active after all the objects have been correctly
selected for a constraint. This option lets you preview the solution by
actually moving the component based on the existing constraints. Additional
constraints may still be applied. After previewing the constraint, choose
Apply or OK to accept the constraint or continue creating another constraint.
If the constraint is not correct, choose Unpreview and use the Selection Steps
to define different FROM and TO faces.

11
List Errors
If there are no degree of freedom indicators visible and the Preview option is
unavailable, you may have tried to define an invalid mating constraint. This
will activate the List Errors option. Choosing it will present information
about the error. The constraint must be deleted and recreated.
OK, Apply, and Cancel Buttons
• OK — This should be selected only after all constraints have been applied.
This will save the mating condition (and its constraints) and dismiss the
Mating Conditions dialog.
• Apply — This will apply the constraint and the dialog will remain open.
• Cancel — This will dismiss the dialog without saving any of the
constraints you added.

11
Tree Listing
The Mating Conditions Tree Listing list all of the assemblies mating
conditions and constraints. Several options and viewing preferences may
be controlled from the Listing Tree.
1 — Mating Condition expanded to display constraint
2 — Mating Constraint suppression toggle
3 — Mating Condition
4 — Mating Constraints
5 — Mating Constraint pop-up menu
Suppress/Unsuppress
Mating Conditions or individual Mating Constraints may be suppressed or

unsuppressed using the check box.
• A suppressed mating constraint is ignored during geometric edits.
• If a mating constraint is being unsuppressed, the mating condition must

be solved again.

11
Mating Constraint Pop-up Menu
The mating constraints pop-up menu is activated by placing the cursor on a
mating constraint and pressing MB3.
• Alternate Solution – Produces any other solution that is applicable to the
selected constraint.
• Convert To – Allows the constraint to be changed to another applicable

constraint, i.e. Mate to Distance.
• Delete – Removes the selected mating constraint.
• Rename – Allows the renaming of a mating constraint.
Mating Condition Pop-up Menu

The mating condition pop-up menu is activated by placing the cursor on a
mating condition and pressing MB3.
Highlight/Unhighlight – will highlight or unhighlight the current condition.

• From – Highlights the FROM object for all constraints of the selected
condition.
• To – Highlights the TO object for all constraints of the selected condition.
• With/Without Direction – Controls the display of the object normal or

direction vectors.
Show/Remove Degrees of Freedom – Controls the display of the remaining

Degrees of Freedom (DOF).

11
Suppress/Unsuppress – Controls the suppression status of the selected
condition. Can also be performed by using the suppression toggle in front
of the condition name.
• A suppressed mating condition is ignored during geometric edits.
• No error messages will be displayed for suppressed mating conditions.
• If you modify a component creating a failed constraint, that constraint

must be deleted before the mating condition can be unsuppressed.
Delete – Removes the selected mating condition.

Rename – Allows the renaming of a mating condition.
Remember Constraints – Mating constraints may be saved for a selected
mating condition within the assembly part. This allows “learned” or
automatic mating when the same component is added to the assembly again.

11
Repositioning Components
The Reposition Component option may be used on a component that does not
have any mating conditions, has suppressed mating conditions, or is only
partially constrained. If the component is partially constrained, its mating
constraints will be enforced within the reposition function.
To reposition a component choose the Reposition Component icon from
the Assemblies toolbar or choose Assemblies→Components→Reposition
Components from the menu bar.

11
Transform Options
The Reposition Component dialog includes the following transform options:
1 — Point to Point 5 — Reposition
2 — Translate 6 — Rotate Between Axes
3 — Rotate About a Point 7 — Rotating Between Points
4 — Rotate About a line
Move Objects or Move Handles Only

These radio buttons let you specify whether you want to move the component
along with the drag handles or just the drag handles. The drag handles can
be repositioned to a specific orientation and used to drag the component along
a specific vector direction or about a specific axis.
Distance or Angle
The Distance input field (or Angle field if a rotation is being defined) lets you
define a distance (or angle) for movement.
Snap Increment
Snap Increment allows snapping to “whole-multiple” distances when using
the direction or rotation drag handles.
Vector Method
Provides options to define a vector when moving a component using one of
the direction drag handles.

11
Snap Handles to WCS
Provides a means for moving the handles to the origin and orientation of
the current WCS.
Motion Animation
This slider lets you specify how finely the motion is animated (from Fine to
Coarse) during the motion that you have defined.
Collision Action
Specifies what the system will do if a collision occurs.
• None — no action is taken.
• Highlight Collision — you can continue moving the components, and the
areas that collided are highlighted.
• Stop Before Collision — the motion stops just before a collision occurs.
The distance between the components when the motion stops depends
on the setting of the Motion Animation slider. The closer the slider is
to Fine, the shorter the distance.
Collision Checking Mode
Allows you to specify what types of objects will be checked for clearance while
repositioning.

11
Repositioning Components Using Drag Handles
Components can be repositioned quickly and easily using drag handles.

When the Reposition Component dialog is displayed, the graphics window
displays a set of handles.
There are several ways to reposition a component with the drag handles.
• To move the origin of the component to a specific point, select the origin
drag handle (filled square) with MB1 and then select a destination point.
The destination points that can be selected are determined by the Snap
Point toolbar.
• To drag the component to an arbitrary cursor location, select the origin

drag handle (filled square) with MB1 and drag to a new cursor location
while holding down MB1.
• To translate the component along an axis, select a translation drag handle

(cone head) and drag the component while holding down MB1.
• To rotate the component about an axis, select a rotation drag handle (filled
circle) and drag the component while holding down MB1.
• To orient the component to a saved coordinate system, select the origin

drag handle (filled square) with MB1 and then select the saved coordinate
system.
The Move Handles Only option is used to first move the drag handles
to a specific orientation before using them to move the component.

11
Activity — Mating the Nut Cracker Components
In this activity, you will assign mating constraints to components of an
assembly. Most of the component parts have already been added to an
assembly. In consideration of available class time, some of the parts have
already had mating conditions applied to them.
Apply associative relationships between components so that changes
in size and shape to an individual component part will update the
locations of adjacent components in the assembly.
Step 1: Open the nut_cracker_assm part and save as

***_nut_cracker_assm.
1 – Crank 4 – Ramrod 7 – Base

2 – Shaft 5 – Smasher Plate 8 – Mount
3 – Link 6 – Hinges
Step 2: Start the Modeling application and turn on the Assembly

application.
Step 3: Assign mating conditions between the Mount and the Shaft.
Choose the Reposition Component icon.

(Assemblies→Components→Reposition Component)
Select the Shaft component and click MB2.

11
Select the square drag handle (origin) and while holding down
MB1, drag the shaft to the location shown below, release MB1,
and choose OK.
Choose the Mate Component icon.

(Assemblies→Components→Mate Component)
Choose Center.
Notice that the From Selection Step is

active.
The Cue line reads: “Select object FROM component to be

mated.” Select the cylindrical face of the shaft component as
shown below.
The Selection Step advances to the TO object and the Cue

line reads: “ Select object on component to mate TO”.

11
Select the cylindrical face of the Mount component as shown
below and choose Preview.
Choose Apply. The constraint is applied and the selection step
returns to From.
Choose Distance.
Select the planar face of the Shaft component as shown below.
Select the face of the Mount component as shown below, key in

a Distance Expression value of 1.5, and then choose Preview.
Choose Apply and then Cancel.
Step 4: Assign mating conditions between the Shaft and the Crank
components.

Choose Align.

11
Select the planar face of the Crank component as shown below.
Select the planar end face of the Shaft component as shown

below and choose Preview. The shaft is oriented to meet the
constraint although it has not been applied yet.
Choose Apply. The previous constraint has now been applied.
Choose Center.
Select the cylindrical face (1) of the Crank component as shown

below.
Select the cylindrical face (2) of the Shaft component as shown

above. Choose Preview to verify your constraint and then
choose Unpreview.

11
Choose Parallel.
Select the internal planar face of the crank as shown below.
Select the planar face on the Shaft component as shown below

and then choose Preview.
The shaft and crank are oriented to reflect the constraint.
If the planar faces are flipped 180°, choose the Alternate

Solution option and then choose OK. If the planar faces are
oriented properly, choose OK until the Mating Conditions
dialog is dismissed.
Step 5: Add the nc_arm component to the assembly.

11
Choose the Add Existing Component icon in the
Assemblies toolbar. (Assemblies→Components→Add Existing)
Choose Choose Part File.
Select nc_arm and choose OK.

The Component Preview window appears and displays the part.
In the Add Existing Part dialog, verify the following settings:

Reference Set = Body
Positioning = Mate
Layer Options = Original
Choose OK.
Choose Center.
In the Component Preview window, select the cylindrical face

as shown below.
In the main graphics window, select the cylindrical face of the

shaft as shown below.
Choose Distance.

11
In the Preview window, select the planar face of the Arm
component for the FROM selection as shown below.
In the main graphics window, select the planar face of the

Shaft component for the TO selection as shown below, enter a
Distance Expression of -.25 and DO NOT press Enter.
Choose Parallel.
Select the internal planar face of the Arm component as shown

below.

11
Select the planar face of the Shaft component as shown below
and then choose Preview.
If the planar faces are flipped 180°, choose Alternate Solution

and then choose Apply. If the planar faces are oriented
properly, choose Apply.
Cancel the Mating Conditions dialog.
Step 6: Reposition the crank component to see the effect of the mating
conditions applied so far.

Select the crank component and choose OK.
Select the square drag handle (origin) and holding down MB1,
drag the crank around in a circular motion and verify that the
shaft and the arm rotate.
Choose MB2 to cancel the repositioning.
Step 7: Assign mating conditions between the Arm and Link components.

Choose Center.

11
Select the cylindrical face of the link (1) shown below for the
FROM selection.
Select the cylindrical face of the arm (2) shown below for the
TO selection.
Choose Apply to apply the constraints.

11
Step 8: Assign mating conditions between the link and the ramrod.
Set the Center Objects filter to 2 to 2.
You will be selecting four faces.
1 — FROM
2 — TO
3 — Second FROM
4 — Second TO

11
Select the faces below in the order indicated:
1 — FROM
2 — TO
3 — Second FROM
4 — Second TO
The orientation of your components may differ than

the illustrations below.
Choose Apply.
Set the Center Objects filter to 1 to 1.

11
Select the faces below as indicated:
1 — FROM
2 — TO
Choose Apply.
Cancel the Mating Constraints dialog.

11
Step 9: Visually verify the mating constraints.
Orient the view to the Trimetric view
(MB3→Orient View→Trimetric).

Select the crank component and accept with MB2.
Drag the crank around using the handles.

Notice how the components move based on the constraints that
have been assigned to them.
Step 10: Save and close all parts.

11
Summary
Assemblies may be created using the Top-Down, Bottom-Up, or a combination
of the two methods.
By applying mating conditions to components, you were able to relate their
locations and orientations in an assembly.
The Reposition Component option may be used in preparation for mating
components.
In this lesson you:
• Added components to an assembly.
• Defined mating conditions.
• Repositioned components.

11
Lesson
12 Datum Features
12
Purpose
This lesson will define datum plane and datum axis features.
Objectives

• Create a Datum Plane.
• Create a Datum Axis.
• Use datum features to position other features.

Datum Features
Datum Feature Overview

Datum features are construction tools that assist in the creation of solid
features and sketches in locations and orientations where planar placement
12 faces do not exist or as associative linear objects. Datum Features may be
created relative to an existing solid model or fixed in model space.
In the case where a hole must pierce a cylinder to a certain depth from the
outside of the cylinder, a construction tool is necessary. This tool is needed
because the hole feature requires a planar placement face for creation rather
than the cylindrical face of the base solid.
Datum Features may be accessed from the General Datums and Points menu
in the Feature Operation toolbar or by choosing Insert→Datum/Point.

Datum Features
Datum Planes
The datum plane option allows a planar reference feature to be created that
has many uses. 12
• To define a sketch plane.
• To serve as the planar placement face for the creation of form features
(i.e. hole, slot, pad, boss, pocket).
• As a target edge for positioning features.
• As a horizontal or vertical reference.
• For the mirror plane when using Mirror Body and Mirror Feature.
• To define the start or end limits when creating extruded and revolved
features.
• To trim a body.
• To define positioning constraints in assemblies.
• To help define a relative Datum Axis.
Relative Datum Planes
A relative datum plane is created in reference to other objects in your model.

You can use curves, faces, edges, points, and other datums as reference objects
for datum planes. There is a wide range of methods you can use to create
relative datum planes.
Fixed Datum Planes
Fixed datum planes do not reference and are not constrained by other
geometric objects. There are methods you can use to create fixed datum
planes based on the WCS and Absolute coordinate systems and by using
coefficients in an equation. You can also use any of the relative datum plane
methods to create fixed datum planes by turning off the Associative option
in the Datum Plane dialog.

Datum Features
Creating Relative Datum Planes
The Datum Plane dialog provides several methods to define a plane. Since
Inferred Plane is the default, you can immediately begin selecting objects in
12 the graphics window and the type will be inferred. As you select objects, a
preview of the datum is displayed in the graphics window.
You can also select the objects first and then choose the Datum Plane
option. The constraints will be inferred from the selected objects and
a preview is displayed.
While the datum plane is previewed, you can specify new constraints and
objects or change the parameters using drag handles displayed in the
graphics window.

Datum Features
Cycle Solution
This option allows you to cycle through alternate solutions when more than
one type of datum plane can be created, based on the object selections and 12
constraints.
Flip Direction
The datum plane preview displays an arrow conehead in its center that
points in the direction of the plane normal. You can change this direction by
choosing this option or using MB3→ Reverse Direction on the conehead.

Datum Features
Common Datum Plane Types
The following are the common datum plane creation methods that will be
covered in this lesson:
12 • Offset Parallel and at a Distance
• Centered Between Two Faces or Planes
• Through the Axis of a Cylindrical Face
• At an Angle to Face or Datum
• Tangent to a Cylindrical Face
• Through Three Points
• Through a Point on a Curve
• Through a Point and at a Specified Direction

Datum Features
Offset Parallel and at a Distance
• Choose the Datum Plane icon. (Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plane)
• Select a planar face. A preview of the datum plane displays, with an offset
12
drag handle.
• Do one of the following:

– Choose OK to accept a value of 0 (zero).
– Key in an Offset value, press Enter, and choose OK.
– Select the handle, drag the datum plane to the desired location and
choose OK.

Datum Features
Centered Between Two Faces or Planes (Bisector Plane)

12
• Select a planar face. A preview of an offset datum plane displays.
• Select a second planar face. A preview of the bisector plane is displayed.
• Choose OK.

Datum Features
Through the Axis of a Cylindrical Face
• Select the cylindrical axis symbol of the cylindrical face in the graphics
12
window.
• Choose OK.

Datum Features
At an Angle to a Face or Datum Plane and Through an Edge or Axis

12
• Select the edge through which the datum plane is to pass. You may choose
the axis of a cylinder instead of an edge.
• Select the planar face or datum plane that the angle will reference.
• Do one of the following:

– Key in a value for the angle (in degrees), press Enter, and choose OK.
– Select the rotation drag handle and drag the datum plane to the
desired angle and choose OK.

Datum Features
Tangent to a Cylindrical Face and Through a Point

12
• Select the cylindrical face.
• Turn on the Point on Curve option in the Snap Point toolbar.
• Select an edge of the cylinder.
• Drag the point to the desired location.
• Choose Cycle Solution until the correct tangent datum plane is

previewed.
• Choose OK.

Datum Features
Tangent to a Cylindrical Face and At an Angle to a Face/Plane
• Establish a planar reference. This could be an existing face/plane or a

new datum plane could be created as follows:
12
– Choose the Datum Plane icon.
– Select the cylindrical axis symbol.
– Choose OK.
• Choose the Datum Plane icon.
• Select the cylindrical face (not on the axis).
• Select the previously created datum plane.
• Choose Cycle Solution until the correct tangent datum plane is

previewed (parallel, perpendicular, or at an angle).
• Choose OK.

Datum Features
Through Three Points
• Set the Snap Point toolbar as desired.

12
• Select three points. A preview of the datum plane is displayed.
• Choose OK.
If it is difficult to select points using the Inferred Plane mode, you can
choose the Curves and Points option in the Datum Plane dialog to
prevent the selection of other inferred object types.

Datum Features
Through a Point on a Curve

12
• Choose the Plane on Curve type.
• Select a point on a curve or edge. A preview of the datum plane is

displayed, with the point on curve marked with a handle.
You can alter the datum plane by dragging the handle of the point to
change its position along the curve or keying in a Location value.
• Choose Cycle Solution until the desired datum plane (tangent,

normal, binormal) is previewed.
• If, in addition to the curve, you select another face or linear edge, the
direction of the datum plane is defined based on this second object as
follows:
– for a planar face, the datum plane is made parallel to the object.
– for a linear edge, the datum plane is made normal to the object.
– for a non-planar face, the datum plane is made parallel to the tangent
plane at the closest point on the surface.
• Choose OK or Apply to create the datum plane.

Datum Features
Through a Point and at a Specified Direction

12
• Choose the Point and Direction option.
• Select a point.
• Use the Vector option menu to define a direction, or accept the default. A
preview of the datum plane is displayed.
• Choose OK or Apply to create the datum plane.
In the example below, a point was defined at the arc center of the hole and a
direction was defined using the Vector Constructor dialog.

Datum Features
Activity — Creating Relative Datum Planes
In this activity, you will create relative datum planes that are associated
to a solid model.
12
Step 1: Open the datum_ref_1 part.
Step 3: Create a Datum Plane Offset at a distance of 1 inch above the

upper face of the block.
Choose the Datum Plane icon.

(Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plane)

Datum Features
Select the top face of the block (1) and confirm the selection if
necessary.
12
A preview of the Datum Plane is displayed along with an Offset

entry field. A direction vector points normal to the face and
represents the positive offset direction.
Key in an Offset value of 1 and press Enter.
Choose Apply (Ctrl-MB2).
Step 4: Create a second datum plane through three points.

Datum Features
The second datum plane will be created diagonally through the

block. The Datum Plane dialog should still be displayed.
12 In the Snap Point toolbar, verify that Control Point is
turned on and Point on Curve is turned off.
Select the first point (1) and confirm any of the edges. Any of
the edges are acceptable because they share the end point.
Carefully select each of the two midpoints (2 & 3).
Choose Apply. (Ctrl-MB2)

The datum plane is created and positioned through the three
selected points. The relationship of this datum plane through
the points will remain if the block parameters are changed.
Step 5: Create the third datum plane midway between the left and right
faces.

Datum Features
The Datum Plane dialog should still be displayed.
Select the right planar face (1).
12
Select the left planar face (2).
Choose OK (MB2).
The datum plane is created and located at the center of the
part and is parallel to the faces selected.
Step 6: Edit the block to verify the parametric relationship of the datum
planes to the block.
With the cursor over the block in the graphics window, press
MB3 and choose Edit Parameters.

Datum Features
Key in the following parameters:
X Length = 2
Y Length = 2
12 Z Length = 5
Choose OK.
The revised values are displayed in the graphics window. The
feature may still be modified without updating the model.
Choose OK in the Edit Parameters dialog to complete the

change.

The constraints applied to the datum planes at the time of
creation continue to control the positioning of the datum planes
after the block is edited.

Datum Features
Selecting and Using Datum Planes
To select a datum plane in the graphics window, the selection ball must be
placed over one of its displayed boundaries.
Form features created using datum planes as the planar placement face are 12
created normal to the datum plane. These features are initially located in the
center of the datum plane by default and will remain there if no positioning
dimensions are specified. If positioning dimensions are specified, the feature
will be moved to the constrained position.
When a datum plane is selected for the planar placement face, a direction
vector is displayed showing the side of the datum plane on which the feature
will be created. An option is available to reverse the direction when creating
the feature.
Editing Datum Planes
To edit the constraints or parameters of a datum plane, use any of the

following methods:
• With the cursor over the datum plane boundary, choose
MB3→Edit Parameters or MB3→Edit with Rollback.
• Double-click on a datum plane boundary (The default action is Edit with

Rollback).
• Choose MB3→Edit Parameters in the Part Navigator.
• Choose Edit→Feature→Edit Parameters and select the datum plane.
• Choose the Edit Feature Parameters icon in the Edit Feature toolbar.
To edit the size of a datum plane, you can drag one of the handles along
its boundaries. These handles appear when previewing the datum during
creation and when editing its parameters.

Datum Features
Deleting Datum Planes
Use any of the following methods to delete a datum plane.

• Choose Edit→Delete
12
• With the cursor over the datum plane boundary, choose MB3→Delete.
• Select the datum plane from the graphics window and either press the
Delete key on your keyboard or choose the Delete icon.
• Choose MB3→Delete in the Part Navigator.
Positioning Features to Datums
When positioning a feature or sketch to a datum plane or axis, you cannot use
positioning dimensions that constrain a point to a point, such as a Horizontal,
Vertical, and Parallel dimensions. You can only use dimensions that constrain
a point to a line, such as a Perpendicular dimension, or a line to a line, such
as a Parallel at a Distance dimension.
If a datum plane is selected, the system projects the datum plane until it
intersects with the planar placement face of the target solid. The intersection
between the datum plane and the target face forms a line, which is used
to constrain the feature or sketch.
The method used to position features should be dictated by the design
intent. Construction of datum features can aid in the application of
positioning dimensions by making design intent easier to achieve.

Datum Features
Activity — Cylindrical Faces and Datum Planes
In this activity, you will create relative datum planes associated to a

cylindrical face.
Step 1: Open the datum_ref_2 part. 12
A hole is required through the cylindrical face at the bottom of

the part, centered in the feature. Relative reference features are
required to accomplish this task.
Step 3: Create a Datum Plane through the feature axis, at an angle to

the existing plane of 90 degrees.


Datum Features
Move the cursor over the outside cylindrical face of the feature
at the bottom of the part and select the cylindrical axis symbol.
12
Select the existing Datum Plane.
Choose Apply to accept the default value of 90 and create the

datum plane. (Ctrl-MB2)
Step 4: Create a datum plane tangent to the outside of the same cylindrical
face to use as a placement face for the hole feature.
The Datum Plane dialog should still be displayed.
Select the cylindrical face of the feature at the bottom of the

part.
Select the original Datum Plane.

Datum Features
Choose Cycle Solution until the new tangent datum

plane is in the orientation shown below.
12
Choose Apply to create the datum plane. (Ctrl-MB2)
Step 5: Create a center datum plane.

Select the two faces shaded below.
Choose OK to create the datum. (MB2)
Step 6: Create a hole.

Datum Features
Choose Simple.
12
Specify a Diameter of 10.
Select the tangent datum plane as the placement face (1).
Ensure that the tool solid for the hole is pointing into the part.
Select the datum plane (2) at the center of the part as the
thru face.
Choose OK.
Use Point onto Line positioning to locate the hole centered

on datum planes (3) and (4).
Step 7: Move the datum planes to another layer.

Choose Format→Move to Layer.

Datum Features
Select all the datum planes.
Choose OK.
Key in 62 and choose OK. 12

The newly created hole will remain centered in the part due
to its relationship with the datum planes that are constrained
to the solid body.

Datum Features
Activity — Creating a Feature on a Relative Datum Plane
In this activity, you will create a relative datum plane and use it as a
placement plane for a hole feature.
12 Create a simple hole at an angle which can be controlled
parametrically.

If the part was opened recently, you can choose
File→Recently Opened Parts and select the part from
a short list rather than the Open Part File dialog. The
Recently Opened Parts list may contain up to ten parts
that have been opened in the current or previous sessions.
Step 3: Create a datum plane through an edge and at an angle to a face.


Datum Features
Select the right edge (1, not the mid point) and confirm the
selection if necessary.
Make sure Point on Curve is turned off in the Snap
Point toolbar.
12
Select the top face (2), and confirm the selection if necessary.
Key in and Angle of 20 and press Enter.
Choose OK (MB2) to create the datum plane.

A datum plane is created at the specified angle from the top
face and passes through the selected edge.
Step 4: Create the hole normal to the datum plane.

Datum Features
Choose Simple for the hole type.
Key in .5 for the diameter.
12 Select the boundary of the newly created datum plane for the
placement face.
Select the bottom face (1) of the block as the Thru Face.
Choose OK. (MB2)

Features are initially located in the center of the datum plane.
If no other positioning dimensions are specified, the hole will
stay in this position. In this case, the hole will be positioned
to the front and right edge of the model.
The Perpendicular icon is already selected for the first

positioning dimension.

Datum Features
Select the edge of the block shown (1), as the target edge.
12
Key in .75 as the positional expression value.
Select the edge of the block shown (1), as the target edge.

Datum Features
Accept the value of 2.0 by choosing MB2.

The hole is positioned to the newly constrained location.
12
Step 5: Modify the angle parameter of the datum plane.

Double-click on the datum plane.
Change the angle from 20 degrees to 75 degrees.
Choose OK. (MB2)
Try 80 and 90 degrees. Can you explain the results?

Datum Features
Activity — Creating a Hole Corner to Corner

In this activity, you will create a relative datum plane using the Point and
Direction option.
The intent is to create a hole feature that goes through one corner of a 12
block and comes out the opposite corner and maintains associativity.
Step 1: Open the seedpart_mm part and save it as ***_hole_corners,

where *** represents your initials.
Step 3: Create a block that is 200 x 100 x 100 on layer 1.
Step 4: Change the work layer to layer 61.
Step 5: Create a datum plane with the point and direction method.

Choose Point and Direction.
Select the end point (1) as shown to define a point on the datum
plane.

Datum Features
Set the Vector Method to Two Points.
12
Select the end points (1 & 2) shown below.
Choose OK (MB2).
Step 6: Create a simple hole perpendicular to the datum plane, through

the block.
Fit the view.
Choose Simple for the hole type.
Key in a diameter value of 25.

Datum Features
Select the datum plane (1) as the placement face.
If the hole is not going into the block, choose Reverse Side.
Select the far side of the block as the thru face (2) and choose
OK.
12
Choose Point onto Point .
Select the end point (1) as shown.
Change the work layer to 1 and make layer 61 invisible.
Step 7: Modify the size of the block.

With the cursor on the block, click MB3 and choose Edit
Parameters.

Datum Features
Click on p2=100.000.
Key in 400.
12 Choose MB2 twice.
Fit the view and note the associativity of the features.

Datum Features
Datum Axis
This option allows a linear reference feature to be created and has several
uses. 12
• Axis of rotation for revolved features.
• Axis of rotation for circular arrays.
• To help define a relative datum plane.
• Directional reference.
• Target for feature positioning dimensions.
Creating Datum Axes
When you choose the Datum Axis option, the Datum Axis dialog is displayed.
The default constraint type is Inferred so that you can immediately begin
selecting objects in the graphics window to define the axis.

Datum Features
Datum Axis Types
Some common methods that will be covered in this lesson include:

• Through Two Points
12
• Through an Edge
• Through a Cylindrical, Conical or Revolved Face Axis
• At the Intersection of Two Faces/Datum Planes
The important function of these Reference Features is that they are

associative to existing geometry.

Datum Features
Through Two Points

To create a datum axis through two points, do the following:
• Choose the Datum Axis icon. (Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Axis) 12

• Select two different point locations.
• Choose OK.

Datum Features
Through an Edge or Curve

To create a datum axis through an edge or curve, do the following:
12 • Choose the Datum Axis icon. (Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Axis)
• Select the edge or curve but not on a control point.
• Choose OK.
The Point on Curve icon in the Snap Point toolbar must be off in
order to create a datum axis through an edge or curve.

Datum Features
Through a Cylindrical Face Axis

To create a datum axis through a cylindrical face, do the following:
• Choose the Datum Axis icon. (Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Axis) 12

• Select the cylindrical face or axis symbol.
• Choose OK.

Datum Features
Through the Intersection of Two Faces/Datum Planes
To create a datum axis through the intersection of two faces or datum planes:
12 • Choose the Datum Axis icon. (Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Axis)
• Select the faces or datum planes.
• Choose OK.
There is no option to create a datum plane at the intersection of two

faces/planes at a specified angle. You would first have to create a
datum axis at the intersection to serve as the pivot position. Then,
create a datum plane through the axis using any other constraint
that applies.

Datum Features
Editing Datum Axes
To edit datum axes parameters, use any of the following methods:

• With the cursor over the selection, click MB3 and choose Edit Parameters
or Edit with Rollback. 12
• Double-click a datum axis in the graphics window. (Edit with Rollback is
the default action.)
• Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters.
• Choose MB3→Edit Parameters in the Part Navigator.
• Choose the Edit Feature Parameters icon.
Deleting Datum Axes
• Use Edit→Delete
• With the cursor over the datum axis, click MB3 and choose Delete.
• Choose the Delete icon.
• Choose MB3→Delete in the Part Navigator.

Datum Features
Activity — Constraining Locations using Datums
In this activity, you will create a relative datum axis and datum plane to
constrain the pivot location of a hole feature.
12 A 0.5 inch diameter hole is to be located in a block. The origin of the
hole will be on the top face and located from the right face. The hole
is to remain centered in the block along the YC axis. The angle of the
hole shall be editable in a plane parallel to the front face.

If the part was opened recently, you can choose
File→Recently Opened Parts and select the part from a
short list rather than the Open Part File dialog.
Step 3: Create the Reference Features.

Change the work layer to 61.


Datum Features
Select the right face (1) on the block as shown.
12
Key in -2 for the Offset value and press Enter.
Choose MB2 to create the datum plane.

Select the back face (2) of the block as shown and confirm.
Select the front face (3) of the block as shown and confirm.
Choose MB2 to create the datum plane.

A center datum plane is created.
Choose the Datum Axis icon.

(Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Axis)

Datum Features
Select the datum plane (1) as shown.
Select the top face (2) as shown.
12
Choose MB2 to create the datum axis.

A datum axis is created at the intersection of the top of the
block and the associative datum plane.

Select the right face (1) of the block as shown.
Select the Datum Axis.
Key in an Angle value of –45 and press Enter.

Datum Features
Choose Apply to create the datum plane.
12
Select the newly created datum plane.
Key in 1 for the Offset value and press Enter.
Choose OK (MB2) to create the datum.
Fit the view.
Step 4: Create a Simple Thru Hole.
Choose Simple.
Key in .5 for the Diameter.

Datum Features
Select the edge of the offset datum plane (1) as shown.
Select the bottom face of the block (2) as the Thru Face, confirm
and choose MB2.
12
Choose Point onto Line.
Select the datum axis as the target edge.

A positioning dimension appears in the graphics window with
a value of 0.
Choose Point onto Line.
Select the center datum plane (1) as shown and choose MB2.
The hole will always remain on the datum axis and stay
centered in the block.

Datum Features
Step 5: Modify the angle parameter of the datum plane.

Double-click on the angled datum plane (1).
12
Change the angle from –45 degrees to –20 degrees.
Choose OK.
The angle of the hole changes, but the point of entry remains
the same.
Step 6: Change the Location of the Datum Axis.

Double-click on the offset datum plane as shown.

Datum Features
Change the Offset from -2 to -3 and choose OK.
12

Datum Features
Datum CSYS
A Datum CSYS (Insert→Datum/Point→Datum CSYS) provides a set of
associative objects consisting of three planes, three axes, a coordinate system, 12
and an origin point. The Datum CSYS appears as a single feature in the Part
Navigator but its objects can be selected individually to support the creation
of other features, constraining sketches, and positioning of components in
an assembly.
The dialog provides options to create a Datum CSYS at the absolute

coordinate system, relative to another existing Datum CSYS, or relative to
existing geometry.

Datum Features
Summary
Datums are reference features that are used as construction tools to assist in
the creation of solid features and sketches in locations and orientations where
12 planar placement faces do not exist.
In this lesson you:
• Created associative datum planes and datum axes.
• Used datum features to create and position form features.
• Edited datum planes to see how associative features are affected.

Lesson
13 Sketching
Purpose 13
This lesson introduces the method of creating a sketch and free hand
sketching of curves.
Objectives

• Create a sketch.
• Create sketch curves.
• Apply dimensional constraints to sketches.
• Apply geometric constraints to sketches.
• Identify constraints.
• Convert a sketch curve to reference.

Sketching
Sketching Overview
What is a sketch?
A sketch is a collection of two-dimensional geometry within a part. Each

sketch is a named collection of 2D curves and points residing on a plane that
you specify. You can use sketches to address a wide variety of design needs.
For example, you might create.
13 • Detailed part features by sweeping, extruding, or revolving a sketch into a

solid or a sheet body.
• Large-scale 2D concept layouts.
• Construction geometry, such as a path of motion, or a clearance arc, that

is not meant to define a part feature.
This lesson will focus on the use of sketches to define detailed part
features.
Sketcher tools let you fully capture your design intent through geometric and
dimensional relationships that we refer to collectively as constraints. Use
constraints to create parameter-driven designs that you can update easily
and predictably. Sketcher evaluates constraints as you work to ensure that
they are complete and do not conflict.
Sketcher offers you the flexibility to create as many, or as few, constraints as
your design requires. Geometric relations may be established between the
curves within a profile as well as with curves in other profiles and model
geometry such as edges or datums.

Sketching
Why sketch?
Sketches provide a high level of control over features and automate the
propagation of changes. You can quickly apply constraints to capture a
well-known design intent.
Once a sketch is placed on a face or datum plane, it will automatically move
when the position of the placement face/datum is changed. Since sketches do
not require constraints, this approach is the quickest way to build features
and still have a sufficient level of associativity.
The inherent ability to solve a sketch in real time means that, as rules are
13
applied, the sketch objects change and move to reflect the effect that the
assigned rule has on the geometry. This gives you the ability to quickly
change profiles of features created using sketches.
Using Sketches for Detail Part Features
When there is a commonly used shape that varies in size, a sketch can easily
accommodate the iterations of the design by editing a single constraint.

Sketching
Sketches should be used as base features of a model if the shape lends itself
to extruded or revolved geometry.
13
Sketches may be used in a number of different ways. Consider them for guide
paths for swept features, or as section curves for free form features.

Sketching
An important aspect of modeling that will help you decide how to use a
sketch is defining the design intent of the model. The design intent consists
of two items:
• Design Considerations — The geometric requirements on the actual
part, including engineering and design rules that determine the detail
configuration of the part.
• Potential Areas for Change — Known design changes or iterations, and

their effects on the part configuration.
13
As a general rule, the more design considerations and potential areas for
change, the more likely there are benefits from sketching.

Sketching
Sketches and the Part Navigator

Sketches can be created by choosing the Sketch Section icon in certain feature
creation dialogs such as Extrude and Revolve, choosing the Sketch icon
directly in the Form Feature toolbar, or by choosing Insert→Sketch.
If you create a sketch from within a feature creation dialog, the sketch of the
section remains internal to the feature. It does not display in the graphics
window or in the Part Navigator. You can edit the sketch by accessing
the associated feature. If the same sketch is required to create additional
13 features, you can choose the Make Sketch External option from the MB3
popup menu in the Part Navigator and it will appear in the graphics window.
If a sketch is not created from within a feature creation dialog, it will appear
as a separate feature in the Part Navigator.

Sketching
Sketch Visibility
Organizing the data in a part is an important aspect of modeling. The

sketcher helps in this endeavor by automating the visibility of sketches are
activated and deactivated.
• If a standalone sketch is created by choosing the Sketch icon in the Form
Feature toolbar (or Insert→Sketch), the current work layer is assigned to
the sketch as it is created. When you subsequently activate the sketch,
the work layer is set to the layer assigned to the sketch so that you do not
accidently construct objects in the active sketch across multiple layers. 13
• If the sketch is created internal to a feature, it automatically becomes
visible when you edit the feature and choose the Sketch Section icon in
the feature dialog.

Sketching
Creating a New Sketch
Defining a Sketch Plane
When creating a sketch, you first need to define the plane on which to place
the sketch curves. But, you must consider the state of the model. Since
the goal is to develop a parametric model, all of the features need to be
associative. Is the sketch going to define the base feature? Is the sketch going
13 to be attached to an existing reference feature or face of an existing body?
An icon option bar shown below appears in the upper left corner of the
graphics window and contains options to define the sketch plane.
1 – Sketch in Place 4 – YC–ZC Plane 7 – Datum CSYS

2 – Sketch Plane 5 – XC–ZC Plane 8 – OK
3 – XC–YC Plane 6 – Datum Plane 9 – Cancel
Defining the Sketch as the Base Feature
If the sketch is going to define the base feature and there is no existing
geometry or reference features in the part, you may define the plane by
choosing one of the following options:
• XC-YC Plane
• YC-ZC Plane
• ZC-XC Plane
• Datum CSYS
Initially, the XC-YC plane will be highlighted in the graphics window. You
can accept this plane or choose one of the other options.
To accept the plane, choose OK (MB2).

After the plane is accepted, the view in the graphics window is
automatically oriented so that it is parallel to the sketch plane. If you
do not want the view to be oriented in this manner, you can turn off
the Change View Orientation setting in Preferences→Sketch.

Sketching
Associate Sketch to Existing Face or Reference Feature
You can also define the sketch plane on an existing planar face, Datum
Plane, or Datum CSYS. A relative Datum Plane or Datum CSYS may also
be created on the fly.
To create the sketch on an existing face, Datum Plane, or Datum CSYS plane.
• Select the face, Datum Plane, or Datum CSYS plane.
• Define the horizontal or vertical reference.

13
• Choose OK.
To create a relative Datum Plane on the fly:
• Choose Datum Plane from the icon option bar in the upper left
corner of the graphics window.
• Select the required objects to define the Datum Plane.
• Choose OK in the Datum Plane dialog.
• Define the horizontal or vertical reference.
• Choose OK.
A similar procedure can be used to create a relative Datum CSYS

on the fly.
If there is an existing Datum CSYS in the part and it is coincident with the
WCS. The X-Y plane of the Datum CSYS will initially highlight as the default
sketch plane. If you choose the XC-YC, YC-ZC, or ZC-XC option, you will be
asked whether to use the corresponding Datum CSYS plane instead.

Sketching
Defining the Reference Direction
The reference direction is used to specify the horizontal direction on the

sketch plane. When there is no linear object pointing in the desired horizontal
direction, a vertical reference may be defined. Because vertical is 90 degrees
(counterclockwise) from horizontal by definition, the horizontal direction
is interpreted from it.
In the example below, the shaded face (1) is specified as the placement
face. An edge (2) is defined as the vertical reference. The resultant sketch
13 orientation is shown to the right.
The direction of an axis may be changed as follows:

• To flip the direction of a sketch axis, double-click on it.
• To specify a new direction, select the axis to redirect and then select a
straight edge. The straight edge is projected to the sketch plane to define
the new direction.
If a datum plane is selected to define the sketch plane, a Z axis will

also be displayed. The normal of the sketch plane may be changed by
double-clicking on the Z sketch axis.

Sketching
Naming a Sketch
Since a unique name is required for each sketch, a default name will
initially be assigned with a numeric suffix. The format of the default name
is "SKETCH_###" where ### is replaced by the next sequential three digit
number beginning with 000 (SKETCH_000, SKETCH_001, etc.). A sketch
name may be defined during or after the sketch has been created by clicking
on the default sketch name, typing in the new name and pressing Enter.
13
The sketch can also be renamed by choosing Sketch→Sketch Properties.

Sketches should be given descriptive names rather than accepting the
default. This allows downstream users to understand the function
of the sketch at a glance.

Sketching
The Active Sketch
In any given part there may be numerous sketches of different features

at different orientations. When using the sketcher, only one sketch may
be worked on at a time. This sketch is called the active sketch. Curves
created while a sketch is active become associated with the active sketch.
When returning to a sketch to add to or modify a profile, the sketch must be
activated. There are a few ways to activate a sketch:
• Double-clicking on a sketch curve.
13
• In the Part Navigator double-click on the sketch feature node.
• Choose the Sketch icon and select the desired sketch from the Sketch
Name pull-down.
There are also a few ways to deactivate an active sketch:
• Choose the Finish Sketch icon.
• Choose Sketch→Finish Sketch.
• Activate a different sketch.
• Choose Sketch→New and create a new sketch.

Sketching
Sketch Creation Steps
Sketch for a Base Feature
• Set the work layer for the sketch.
• Choose the Sketch icon.
• Define the sketch plane on a WCS plane (XC-YC, YC-ZC, or ZC-XC) or 13

create a Datum CSYS at absolute coordinates.
• Name the sketch.
• Choose OK.
Sketch on an Existing Face or Reference Feature
• Set the work layer for the sketch.
• Choose the Sketch icon.
• Select the face, Datum Plane, or Datum CSYS plane. (You could also
create a relative Datum Plane or Datum CSYS on the fly.)
• Define the horizontal or vertical reference
• Name the sketch.
• Choose OK.

Sketching
Activity — Sketch Creation

In this activity, you will create a sketch on an existing face and another
sketch on a datum plane that is created on the fly.
Step 1: Open the seedpart_in part.
Step 3: Create a sketch for a base feature.

13 Make layer 21 the work layer.
Choose the Sketch icon. (Insert→Sketch)
Choose the YC-ZC Plane.
Click on the sketch name, key in base and press Enter.
Choose OK. (MB2)
The sketch is created. In addition, a fixed datum plane is created

on the specified sketch plane and two fixed datum axes are created
along its major axes.
The specified sketch plane defines a Feature Coordinate System
(FCS) for the sketch such that the X axis is parallel to the
horizontal direction and the Y axis is vertical. The WCS is
automatically manipulated to the FCS orientation to facilitate
the creation of sketch geometry.
Step 4: Exit the Sketcher.
Choose the Finish Sketch icon. (Sketch→Finish Sketch)
Step 5: Close the part and do not save.
Step 6: Open the sketch_creation_1 part.
Step 8: Create a sketch on an existing face.

Make layer 21 the work layer.

Sketching
The Sketch Plane icon is already selected.
Select the face (1) shown below.

The 2D sketch plane indicator appears and the X-Axis is active
(highlighted).
13
Select the horizontal reference (2) at the location shown below.
Click on the sketch name, key in skt1 and press Enter.
Choose OK. (MB2)
Step 9: Create a curve on the sketch plane.
Choose the Circle icon. (Insert→Circle)

Sketching
Create a circle by selecting at location (1) and then location (2).
13
Choose the Finish Sketch icon. (Task→Finish Sketch)
Step 10: Change the orientation of the face that defines the sketch plane.
Select the expression Change_Me and change the formula to

3.5.
Choose OK.
Rotate the part and notice how the circle remains associative
to the face.
Step 11: Create a sketch on a datum plane.
Orient the view to Trimetric. (Home key)
Make layer 22 the work layer, layer 21 invisible, and layer 1

selectable.
Choose Datum Plane.

Sketching
Select the two shaded faces shown below.
13
Choose OK in the Datum Plane dialog.

A center datum plane is created.
The 2D sketch plane indicator appears and the X-Axis is active

(highlighted).

Sketching
Select the edge for the horizontal reference at the location

indicated below.
13
Click on the sketch name, key in skt2 and press Enter.
Choose OK. (MB2)
YC
ZC XC
Choose the Finish Sketch icon.
Step 12: Activate an existing sketch by selecting geometry.

Make layer 21 selectable.

Sketching
Double-click on the sketch curve (1) shown below.
13

Sketch SKT1 is activated and oriented in the graphics window.
Step 13: Activate an existing sketch by name.
Choose the Sketch icon.

Sketching
Choose SKT2 from the sketch name option menu.
13 Sketch SKT2 is activated and oriented in the graphics window.
YC
ZC XC

Sketching
Sketch Curves
Sketch curves are created via the Sketch Curve toolbar. As curves are
created geometric constraints are assigned to the curves relative to the Infer
Constraints Settings.
1 – Profile
2 – Line
3 – Arc
4 – Circle
13
Infer Constraint Settings

The Infer Constraints Settings dialog determines which constraints are
automatically created during curve creation. It is accessed by choosing
the Infer Constraint Settings icon from the Constraints toolbar or
Tools→Constraints→Infer Constraint Settings.
As you create the curves a symbol will appear near the curve being created to
represent the constraint that will be applied, if any.

Sketching
Locking a Constraint
When a constraint symbol appears during curve creation you may lock in that
constraint by pressing MB2. For example, if you are creating a line and the
parallel symbol appears, press MB2. As you move the cursor, the new line
that is rubber banding is doing so parallel to the reference curve.
Snap Angle
The snap angle is a preference setting in the Sketch Preferences dialog that is
13 applied when curves are being created. It is used to "snap" a line to horizontal
or vertical. The default snap angle is set to 3° and is user definable between
0° and 20°. This angular tolerance is defined on either side of horizontal or
vertical from the first specified location, effectively creating a 6° tolerance
zone by default.
When creating lines outside of the sketcher, snap angle only applies
when using inferred cursor location.
Snap Point Toolbar
The Snap Point toolbar can be displayed when creating most of the curve types
in the sketcher so that you have more control over the selection of locations.
When the Snap Point toolbar is active, regardless of the point types turned
on, cursor location is always available.

Sketching
Alignment Lines While Creating Curves
In the process of creating a curve, if you are horizontally or vertically opposite

a control point, the system will display an alignment line. The example below
depicts an existing curve (1) with a new curve (2) being created as well as the
alignment curves (3).
13
Profile Tool
The Profile tool allows creation of a string of lines and arcs without having to
specify a start for each curve after the first curve is created. The Profile tool
is turned on by default when you first create a sketch and can be accessed by
choosing the Profile icon on the Sketch Curve toolbar.
The icon options in the upper left corner of the graphics window allow you to
switch between creating lines (1) or arcs (2) and allow you to switch between
Coordinate Mode (3) or Parameter Mode (4). Line creation and Coordinate
Mode are the defaults.
Once you have created the first curve (line or arc), the default will revert back
to Line. You can switch to arc creation by using press-drag-release with MB1.

Sketching
The "circle-X" symbol (1) controls the direction in which the arc will be
created.
If the desired arc is in the wrong direction, release MB1, pass the cursor over
the end of the line, and exit in a different quadrant of the symbol.
13 Arc originating from
top quadrant
Arc originating from

left quadrant

right quadrant

bottom quadrant
As you create curves with the profile tool, the string mode can be broken
by clicking MB2.

Sketching
Creating Lines
Line creation is accessed by choosing the Line icon on the Sketch Curve
toolbar.
Once in line creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics window
provide two options: Coordinate Mode (by cursor location or keying in an XC
and YC coordinates) and Parameter Mode.
13
There are several ways to create a line:

• Locate the start, and then locate the end.
• Locate the start, and then enter the length and angle parameters.
• Locate the start, enter one parameter, and then locate the end.
• Key in the parameters and then locate the start.
Once you indicate a start location, the system will switch to the Parameter
Mode. But, you can still specify an end location without switching back to
Coordinate Mode.

Sketching
Creating Arcs
Arc creation is accessed by choosing the Arc icon on the Sketch Curve toolbar.
Once in arc creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics window
give you two sets of options. The first is creation method, and the second is
for the Coordinate/Parameter Mode.
13
There are two different arc creation methods:
Arc by 3 Points — There are several ways to create the arc with
this method:
• Locate the start, locate the end, and then locate a point on the arc.
• Locate the start, enter a radius value and press Enter, locate the end
point, and then move the cursor to preview and choose which of the
four possible solutions to create.
• The same as the previous, but enter the radius value after locating the
end point, but before the point on arc.
Arc by Center and End Points — There are several ways to create
an arc with this method:
• Locate the center, locate the start point, and locate the end point. (The
start point location determines the radius.)
• Locate the center, locate the start point, enter a radius value and press
Enter, locate the end point.
• Locate the center, enter radius and sweep angle values and press
Enter, locate the start of the sweep, and specify the direction for the
sweep.
Once you indicate a first location, the system will switch to Parameter
Mode. But you can still specify locations with the cursor without switching
back to Coordinate Mode.

Sketching
Creating Circles
Circle creation is accessed by choosing the Circle icon on the Sketch Curve
toolbar.
Once in circle creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics
window provide two sets of options. The first is creation method, and the
second is for the Coordinate/Parameter Mode.
13
There are two different circle creation options:
Circle by Center and Diameter — There are a few ways to create a

circle with this option:
• Locate the center, and then locate a point on the circumference of
the circle.
• Locate the center, enter a Diameter, and press Enter. The circle is
created. You are then in multiple circle creation mode - just indicate
another location for a circle center.
• Locate the center, drag the radius until you get the size you want.
Press Enter. The circle is created, and you are in multiple circle
creation mode. Indicate another center.
Circle by 3 Points — There are two ways to create a circle with

this option:
• Locate three points on the circumference of the circle.
• Locate two points on the circumference of the circle, enter a radius

value and press Enter, then choose which of the two options you want
by cursor location.
Once you indicate a first location, the system will switch to the enter
Parameters mode. But you can still give a location without changing
back to XY.

Sketching
Activity — Using the Sketch Profile Tool
In this activity, you will use the Profile tool to create sketch geometry.
Step 1: Open seedpart_in and save it as ***_sketch_profile_1 where ***

Change the Work Layer to 21.

13 Step 3:
Step 4: Create a sketch on the XC-YC plane.
Choose OK to accept the XC-YC Plane.
Step 5: Add icons to the Sketch Constraints toolbar.
Select the Toolbar Options area of the Sketch Constraints

toolbar and choose Add or Remove Buttons→Sketch
Constraints.
Make sure the Infer Constraint Settings and Create Inferred

Constraints icons are toggled on.
You may have to move the toolbar to see the icons after
they are added.
Step 6: Set the Infer Constraints Settings.

This is done so that only the constraints that you may want to
apply will be available during curve creation.

Sketching
Choose the Infer Constraint Settings icon.

(Tools→Constraints→Infer Constraint Settings)
Turn on only the following constraints.

Horizontal
Vertical
Tangent
Parallel
Perpendicular
13
Coincident
Dimensional Constraints
Choose OK.
Step 7: Create a Profile.

In this step you will create the sketch curves shown below using
the Profile tool.
Choose the Profile icon (Insert→Profile) and move the

cursor into the graphics window.
Select a start location with the cursor near the bottom left
corner of the graphics window (approximately XC=-4, YC=-2)

Sketching
Move the cursor so that the rubber-banding line snaps to the

horizontal orientation and the horizontal symbol displays (1)
as shown below.
13 Notice the horizontal symbol indicating the constraint that is

going to be applied to the line.
Press MB2 to lock in the horizontal constraint.

Now notice that as you move the cursor around, the
rubber-banding line remains horizontal.
Key in 3 for the Length and press Enter.
Notice that a dimensional constraint is created automatically.

This is because a Length value was explicitly entered and
the Dimensional Constraints option was turned on in the
Infer Constraint Settings dialog.
Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor straight up from the end
point of the last line and then release.
You are now in Arc creation mode.

Sketching
Key in 1 for the Radius and press Enter.
Key in 180 for the Sweep Angle and press Enter.
Click MB1 in the graphics window to apply.

13
Continue using the Profile tool to create the remaining curves

in the sketch as shown below. You do not have to key in exact
values but just create the approximate shape.
Close the profile by selecting the end point of the first line.
Dimensions maybe added at a later time to constrain

the remaining curves to specific sizes.
Step 8: Save and close the part.

Sketching
Optional Challenge
Practice sketching the following profiles:
13

Sketching
Creating Fillets
Fillet creation is accessed by choosing the Fillet icon on the Sketch Curve
toolbar.
Once in fillet creation, icon options appear in the upper left corner of the
graphics window. The Trim Inputs option (1) determines whether or not the
original curves are trimmed. The Delete Third Curve option (2) determines
whether the middle curve is deleted in a three-curve fillet. The Create
Alternate Fillet option (3) will produce a complementary solution for the fillet
13
(e.g. a 270 degree arc instead of the default 90 degree arc).
You can create fillets between lines, arcs or conics. You can also create a fillet
between two parallel lines.
There are several ways to create Fillets:
• Select two curves with a single selection (at their intersection), and then
drag the size and quadrant.
• Select two curves individually, and drag the size and quadrant.
• Select one curve, enter a radius value, and select the second curve.
• Select two curves individually, enter a radius value, and the indicate the
desired quadrant.
• Drag (with MB1) across the two curves you want to fillet. The size of the
fillet is determined by where the curves are selected.

Sketching
Trimming and Extending Curves
Quick Trim
This option will allow you to trim any curve to the closest curve in the sketch
and preview the results in preselection color.
13
You can trim multiple curves at one time, by using the "crayon" select method.
Hold down MB1 and drag across the portion of curves you want to trim away.
You can select a specific curve to trim to, by using Ctrl-select to select the
desired boundary curve. More than one bounding curve can be selected using
this method.
In the example below, both the arc on the left and the spline on the right were
Ctrl-selected as boundary curves. With the cursor on the top line, (between
the two boundary curves), the center section is previewed as the portion to
be removed.

Sketching
When a curve is trimmed, appropriate constraints are automatically created.

In the previous example, two Point on Curve constraints and one Collinear
constraint are added. If one of the boundary curves is later trimmed to the
line, the Point on Curve constraint would change to Coincident.
13
If you trim an arc to a line that is tangent, the tangency constraint is retained.

Sketching
Quick Extend
This option will extend lines, arcs and conics to the closest curve in the
sketch. The system will preview the results in the preselection color.
The curve being extended must extend to an actual intersection with the
boundary curve.
You can extend multiple curves at one time, by using the "crayon" select
13 method. Hold down MB1 and drag across the ends of curves you want to
extend.
You can also select specific boundary curves by using the control-select
method.
As with Quick Trim, when you use Quick Extend, appropriate constraints are
automatically created.

Sketching
Activity — Creating Fillets
In this activity, you will create fillets in an existing sketch.
Step 1: Open the sketch_fillet_1 part.
13
Step 3: Activate the sketch.
Double-click on any of the sketch curves.

Turn off the Dimensional Constraints setting.
Choose OK.
Step 5: Create a 4 mm radius fillet using lines L16 and L20 with a single
selection and trimming the lines.
Choose the Fillet icon. (Insert→Fillet)
Make sure Trim Inputs is on (highlighted background).

Sketching
Key in 4 in the Radius field on the graphics window, and press

Enter.
Select both lines at the same time, by selecting at their

intersection.
13
Drag the cursor around the screen and notice that you can
select which quadrant you want.
Select in the lower right quadrant to place the fillet in the

desired quadrant.
Step 6: Create a 4 mm fillet using lines L16 and L17 with a single selection
and do not trim the lines.
Turn off Trim Inputs. (background not highlighted)

Sketching
Select the two lines at their intersection.
Select in the upper right quadrant.

13
Step 7: Create a 4 millimeter fillet between lines L17 and L18. Select by
dragging across the two lines.
The 4.0 Radius value should still be in the text field on the
graphics window.
With MB1 held down, drag across the two lines as below: (This
is another method of selecting the curves to be filleted. The
curves crossed with the "crayon" are the curves selected.)
Notice that the 4 millimeter radius was used.

Sketching
Step 8: Create another fillet between lines L18 and L20 by using the
"crayon", but this time do NOT use a radius value.
Use Backspace to erase the 4 in the text field.
Drag (with MB1), as shown below:

13
It used the selection location of the curves to determine the

radius.

Sketching
Step 9: Create a fillet between lines L18 and L19, and drag the size and
quadrant.
Individually select the lines L18 and L19.
Drag the cursor around the screen.
Select a location to create an arc similar to the one shown below.
13

Sketching
Activity — Using Quick Trim and Quick Extend

In this activity, you will trim and extend existing sketch geometry.
Step 1: Open the sketch_quick_1 part.
13
Step 3: Trim curves with Quick Trim.

Double-click on one of the sketch curves to activate the sketch.
Choose the Quick Trim icon. (Edit→Quick Trim)
Select the line at the location of the arrow below.

Sketching
Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor across the two curves as
shown below.
13
Ctrl-Select the curves (1) and (2) for boundaries. Select on

curves (3) and (4) to trim the center portion.
Step 4: Extending curves with Quick Extend.
Choose the Quick Extend icon. (Edit→Quick Extend)

Sketching
Place the cursor on the arc at location (1) shown below.
13
The status line informs you that the curve cannot be extended.
This is because there is no other curve that would intersect
the arc.
Place the cursor on the arc at location (2) shown below.
This time, an intersection is found and a preview is provided.
Select the arc at location (2) to create the extension.

Sketching
Step 5: Continue to experiment with Quick Trim and Quick Extend until
the instructor is ready to continue.
Step 6: Choose the Finish Sketch icon.
13

Sketching
Sketch Points
Sketch objects are defined by theoretical points. A line, for instance, is defined
by two points. The sketcher attempts to mathematically solve for the location
of the points by analyzing the constraints (rules) that are placed on objects.
The points that the sketch solver analyzes are referred to as sketch points.
By controlling the locations of these sketch points the curve itself may be
controlled. There are various ways to control these points. The sketch points
associated with different types of curves are illustrated in the graphic below.
13
Line Arc Circle Fillet
Spline Point Ellipse
Degree-of-Freedom (DOF) Arrows
Degree of freedom arrows are displayed at a sketch point when the solver is
unable to fully determine where the sketch point is located on the sketch
plane based on existing constraints and dimensions. They are only displayed
during the creation of dimensions or constraints.
The DOF arrows can point in both the horizontal and vertical directions. An
arrow pointing to the right means that the sketch point is free to move left or
right in the horizontal direction. An arrow pointing up means that the sketch
point is free to move up or down in the vertical direction.
These arrows provide visual feedback while you are constraining the sketch.
Undefined Undefined in Undefined in Defined in

in X and Y Y Direction X Direction X and Y
Directions Directions
(no display)

Sketching
DOF arrows are removed as rules are written that define the location of the
sketch points.
• Arc - Arcs have sketch points at the center and at either end. These
sketch points as well as the radius of the arc may be defined.
• Circle - Circles may have the center point as well as a radius or diameter
defined.
• Ellipse - An ellipse may have the location of its center defined; also, the
parameters for the size and orientation of the ellipse are stored for future 13
editing.
• Fillet - A Fillet is a special case of arc. By definition a fillet is tangent to

the objects with which it is associated and this rule is applied as it is
created. Fillets are also defined by the center and end points but the
tangency will help determine the location of these points.
• Line - Lines may have the sketch points at either end defined.
• Point - Points may be defined relative to other objects or at specific

locations in space.
• Spline - Degree three splines may have their defining points located.
Slopes of the spline at the defining points may also be defined. Splines
that are of a degree other than three may be added to sketches; however,
since their defining points are not located at their knot points, there is no
way to locate their defining points using constraints.
If any of the sketch points that define a curve are unconstrained, the curve is
displayed in the color specified by the Partially Constrained Curves setting
in Preferences→Sketch→Colors. When all defining points are constrained,
the curve will change to the color specified by the Fully Constrained Curves
setting in Preferences→Sketch→Colors. Theses colors only apply during the
creation of dimensions or constraints.

Sketching
Design Intent
The power in sketching is derived from the ability to capture design intent.
You do this by creating rules, called constraints, that dictate how sketch
objects will react to changes.
As many or as few constraints as necessary may be applied to cause the
sketch profile to update in the manner desired.
13 NX sketches are not required to be fully constrained.
Creating Sketch Dimensions

A dimension controls the size of a sketch object, such as the length of a line or
radius of an arc, or the relationship between two objects, such as a distance
or angle.
Dimensions appear in the graphics window. Unlike drafting dimensions,
changing the value of the sketch dimensions changes the shape and or size of
dimensioned objects. This changes any features, such as extrude or revolve
features, that the sketch curves control.
Dimensions may be applied by using

the dimension menu on the Sketch
Constraints toolbar.
1 — The default Inferred Dimensions icon
infers the dimension type based on the
objects that are selected and the position
of the cursor.
2 — The other dimension icons are useful
when the system is unable to infer the
desired dimension type. These different
options are "filters" that when selected
will only allow a specific dimension type
to be created.
Certain types of geometry may not be
selectable if they do not coincide with the
dimension type selected.

Sketching
As dimensions are being created, the dimension, its extension lines, and
arrows are displayed as soon as the geometry has been selected.
• Drag the dimension until it is the correct type, for example horizontal
or parallel.
• Place the dimension by clicking MB1.
• Click and drag the dimension to the desired location.
Sometimes, a dimension type may be inferred before all of the geometry has 13
been selected. In this case, continue to select geometry until the correct
dimension type is displayed, or select the icon for the dimension type you
desire and select the geometry again.
An expression is also created for each dimension. The name (1) and value
(2) of the expression appear in a text box in the graphics window after the
dimension has been placed. You may key in a new name or value. Press
the Enter key to activate the change.
Sketch Dimension Dialog
The Sketch Dimensions Dialog icon accesses the Dimensions dialog.

Sketching
You can use the dialog to help create and edit dimensions. You can change the
value of a dimension by either keying it in or using the slider bar.
13
There are also two option menus to change the appearance of the dimension.
The Placement option menu is for defining how the text and arrows of the
dimension will be displayed. Options are for automatic placement of text and
arrows (1), manual text placement with arrows inside the extension lines (2),
or manual text placement with the arrows outside the extension lines (3).
The Leader option menu is for defining whether the dimension’s leader is
attached to the left (1) or right (2) of the dimension text.
Both of these option menus may be used before, during or after dimension
creation.
Text Height
The Text Height controls the displayed height of the dimension text.
Modifying this value will affect the display of all dimensions in the active
sketch.
The Text Height option can also be accessed by choosing

Preferences→Sketch.
The Fixed Text Height option in Sketch→Preferences controls the size of

the dimension text when you zoom. If this option is turned on, the text will
remain the same size relative to the screen as you zoom in and out.

Sketching
Dimension Types
Inferred — The dimension type (except perimeter) is inferred based on

the objects selected and the cursor location.
Horizontal — Specifies a distance constraint between two points with

respect to the X-axis of the sketch coordinate system. Points, points on sketch
curves, edges, lines, and arcs are selectable.
13
Vertical — Specifies a distance constraint between two points with

respect to the Y-axis of the sketch coordinate system. Points, points on sketch
curves, edges, lines, and arcs are selectable.

Sketching
Parallel — Specifies a constraint for the shortest distance between two

sketch points. All sketch objects are selectable using this method. The points
selected will be inferred from the objects selected.
13
Perpendicular — Specifies a distance constraint measured

perpendicular to a selected line and a point. If the desired point is an
endpoint of a line, this endpoint must be selected as the second object.
Angular — Specifies an angular constraint between two linear objects.
Radius — Specifies a radial size constraint for an arc or circle.

Sketching
Diameter — Specifies a diameter size constraint for an arc or circle.
13
Perimeter — Constrains the collective lengths of lines and arcs to a
desired value. After selecting the curves and choosing MB2, an expression
is automatically generated with a “Perimeter_” prefix added to the name.
(i.e. Perimeter_p7=6.456). There will be no graphical representation of this
constraint in the graphics window.

Sketching
Activity — Adding Dimensional Constraints
In this activity, you will capture the design intent for a part by adding rules
that will control how the part is to change. These rules allow the part to be
easily modified.
The included angle of the adjustment slot should change from 45° to
75° by dimensional constraints.
Step 1: Open angle_adj_1.

13
Step 3: Add the required dimensions.

Double-click on one of the sketch curves to activate the sketch.
Choose Preferences→Sketch.
Verify the Text Height is set to .10 and choose OK.
Choose the Inferred Dimensions icon.

(Insert→Dimensions→Inferred)
Select the lower angled line (1, not endpoint).
The system infers that you wish to create a horizontal, vertical,

or parallel dimension depending on the placement of the cursor
relative to the geometry. DO NOT PLACE THE DIMENSION!

Sketching
Select the upper angled line (2, not endpoint).
13
Select a cursor location to place the dimension.
Select the horizontal line (1, not endpoint) across the bottom.
Select the lower angled line (2, not endpoint).

Sketching
Select a cursor location to place the dimension.
13
Choose MB2 to exit dimension creation mode.
Step 4: Change the viewpoint.

Choose MB3→Orient View to Model.
There are times, such as geometry creation, when looking directly

at the plane of the sketch is beneficial. At other times, it may
help to change the view point to see the effects of changes on the
geometry.

Sketching
Editing Dimensions
The editing of dimensions may be achieved as follows:
• To edit the value or the name, simply double-click on the dimension and
edit the value or the name in the text box and press Enter.
• To edit the position, place cursor over a dimension, press and hold down
MB1, and simply drag the dimension’s location.
• Additional editing that may be done with the Dimensions dialog as listed
below:
13
Name — Key in a new name in the text entry field.
Value — Key in a new value in the text entry field or use
the slider.
Position — Click and hold MB1 on the dimension and drag
to new position.
Text placement — Select a different option from the option menu.
Leader side — Select a different option from the option menu.
Text height — Key in a new text size in the text entry field.
The name and value of a dimension may also be edited by using the
Expressions dialog. As dimensions are edited, the constraints are
evaluated and the geometry is modified.
Delay Evaluation
Delay Evaluation prevents geometry changes as one or more dimensions are
modified. This is available as an icon on the Sketcher toolbar or by choosing
Tools→Delay Sketch Evaluation.
Evaluate Sketch
Evaluate Sketch controls sketch evaluation when Delay Evaluation is on.
(Sketches are evaluated automatically when you exit from the Constraints
dialog.) This is available as an icon on the Sketcher toolbar or by choosing
Tools→Evaluate Sketch
Update Model
Update Model forces the model to update without leaving the sketch
function. (The model is updated automatically when you exit from the sketch
environment.) This is available as an icon on the Sketcher toolbar or by
choosing Tools→Update Model.

Sketching
Retain Dimensions
When a sketch is deactivated the dimensions are normally hidden.

Retain Dimensions is a toggle in the Sketch Preferences dialog to retain
dimension display after the sketch is deactivated.
13
Retain Dimensions applies only to the active sketch, thus to suit your needs
you may have a mixture of sketches with and without retained dimensions.
Use this setting when you need to display dimensions without an active
sketch, for example to reference expression names between sketches, when
creating features, or for plotting.

Sketching
Activity — Editing Sketch Dimensions
In this activity, you will edit dimensional constraints and see that they do not
sufficiently control the angle bracket from the previous activity.
Step 3: Change the layer settings.

Make layer 1 Selectable.
13

Sketching
Step 4: Edit a dimension.

Place the cursor over a sketch curve and choose MB3→Edit.
Double-click on the 45° dimension.
In the dynamic input field, key in 75 and press Enter.
13

Sketching
Step 5: Edit another dimension.

Double-click on the 15° dimension.
In the dynamic input field, key in 25° and press Enter.
13
Notice how the geometry updates.

Basic geometric assumptions that we make when we look at this
geometry are not specified to the system, i.e. the bottom line has
no horizontal constraint applied.
If the geometry had been created in the sketch rather than added to
the sketch some of these geometric assumptions would have been
added to the geometry as constraints during the creation process.

Sketching
Choose Undo twice. (MB3→Undo)
Close the part.

13

Sketching
Geometric Constraints
A geometric constraint establishes a geometric characteristic of a sketch
object (such as defining a line as being horizontal) or the type of relationship
between two or more objects (such as requiring that two lines be parallel or
perpendicular, or that several arcs have the same radius).
Unlike dimensional constraints, geometric constraints have no editable
numeric values; a constant angle constraint, for instance, simply dictates that
the line stay at the angle it is at when the constraint is applied. 13
To create geometric constraints, choose the Constraints icon, select the
objects, and choose the desired constraint from the icon option bar that
appears in the upper left corner of the graphics window. Only icons for
constraints that apply to the selected geometry will be displayed.
You may also choose the constraint from an MB3 pop-up menu after selecting
the geometry.
To assign multiple constraints at one time, press the Ctrl key while
selecting the objects. The icon option bar for the constraints will
then remain in the upper left corner of the graphics window after
you choose the first constraint. You can use MB2 or the Esc key to
cancel creation of constraints.

Sketching
Types of Geometric Constraints
Coincident Constrains two or more points as having the

same location.
Collinear Constrains two or more linear objects as lying on

or passing through the same theoretical straight
line.
Concentric Constrains two or more arcs as having the same
13 center.
Constant Angle Constrains a line so as to remain in its current

orientation without input of an angular value.
Constant Length Constrains a line so as to remain at its current

length without input of a length value.
Equal Length Constrains two or more lines as being the same

length.
Equal Radius Constrains two or more arcs as having the same

radius value.
Fixed Constrains unchangeable characteristics for

geometry, depending on the type of geometry
selected. You can apply a Fixed constraint to an
individual sketch point or to an entire object.
Horizontal Constrains a line as being parallel to the FCS
X-axis.
Midpoint Constrains the location of a point to be

equidistant from both ends of the curve.
Select the curve anywhere other than at
its end points.
Parallel Constrains two or more linear objects as being
parallel to each other.
Perpendicular Constrains two linear objects as being

perpendicular to each other.
Point on Curve Constrains the location of a point as lying on the

path or projection of a curve.
Point on String Constrains the location of a point as lying on an

extracted string.

Sketching
Scale, When applied, a spline will scale in the horizontal

Non–Uniform direction while keeping the original dimensions
in the vertical direction during modification.
Scale, Uniform A spline will scale proportionally in both the
horizontal and vertical when the horizontal
length changes.
Slope of Curve Constrains a spline, selected at a defining point,
and another object as being tangent to each other
Tangent
at the selected point.
Constrains two objects as being tangent to each
13
other.
Vertical Constrains a line as being parallel to the FCS

Y-axis.
Displaying Constraint Symbols

Constraint symbols are displayed when a sketch is active. Symbols for
Coincident, Point on Curve, Midpoint, Tangent, and Concentric are always
displayed.
The Show All Constraints option will display the symbols for all the
constraints in the active sketch.
The various constraint symbols are shown below:
Fixed Constant Angle

Collinear Concentric
Horizontal Tangent
Vertical Equal Radius
Parallel Coincident
Perpendicular Point on Curve
Equal Length Midpoint of Curve
Constant Length Point on String
Mirror Scale, Uniform
Slope of Curve Scale, Non-Uniform
If the sketch curves are relatively small (the view is zoomed out), the
symbols may not be displayed. You may need to zoom in to see them.

Sketching
Show/Remove Constraints
Show/Remove Constraints helps you manage constraints. The constraints

may be listed by object(s) or all of the constraints of the active sketch may
be listed at once.
1 — List all constraints

or by object(s).
13 2 — Filter for the type
of constraint to list.
3 — Determines if the
filtered constraint types
will be included or excluded.
4 — Category of
constraints to list.
5 — Actions to take on the

listed constraints.
Constraint Interrogation
While the Show/Remove dialog is displayed, you can determine what

constraints are present by passing the selection ball over a sketch object. If
the object has an associated constraint, the object will be pre-highlighted
along with any other objects that share the constraint. The constraint symbol
will appear next to the sketch objects. If an object which has no constraints
associated with it, it will not highlight.

Sketching
Constraint Categories
There are two major categories of constraints, Explicit and Inferred.

Explicit constraints are constraints that you create by assignment using the
constraints dialog or by virtue of the creation method. Inferred constraints
are Coincident constraints that the system has inferred and created
during the curve creation process. You have the option to list only Explicit
constraints, only Inferred constraints, or both.
13
Constraint Listing
The constraints may also be listed in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog by

selecting one of the three options at the top of the dialog window.
Selected Object Once an object is selected, the associated

constraints, depending on the selected constraint
category, are listed in the dialog. To view
constraints associated with a different sketch
object, simply select the new object.
Selected Objects Allows the selection of multiple objects; the
associated constraints, depending on the selected
constraint category, are listed in the dialog. Objects
may be deselected by holding the shift key down
and selecting the object.
All in Active List all the constraints of the active sketch,
Sketch depending on the selected constraint category.
Listing Box
Any time there are constraints listed in the list box they may be browsed by
selecting the constraint to highlight it. When the constraint is highlighted in
the list box, the sketch object(s) that is associated with it is also highlighted
in the graphics window. The Step Up the List and Step Down the List buttons
allow easy navigation through the various constraints. The Up and Down
arrows on most keyboards will mimic this behavior.

Sketching
Information
The Information button located on the Show/Remove Constraints dialog will

list all of the constraints in the active sketch to the information window.
This is useful should there be a need to make a hard copy of the constraints
or save them as a text file.
Removing Constraints
Constraints may be deleted by these methods:

13
• Highlight them in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog List box and select
Remove Highlighted Constraint(s), or just double click them in the list.
• Turn on Select Constraints (on the Selection toolbar), select the constraint
symbol on the graphics window, and then choose the Delete icon.
• Turn on Select Constraints, select the constraint symbol on the graphics

window, and then use MB3→Delete to delete selected constraint.
Undo
Undo from the Edit pull-down menu, the Undo icon on the Standard toolbar,
the MB3 pop-up menu, or the accelerator keys. Undo takes the user actions
back one step at a time.
After an Undo is performed, the Redo option is available in the Edit
pulldown menu or Standard toolbar.
Dragging Geometry
Under constrained geometry can be dragged only when not in a constraint

creation mode. Simply hold down and drag MB1 while on the selected
curve(s) or point(s).
Selection
When in the Sketcher Task Environment, the selection toolbar changes. It

has two icons that are only available in the Sketcher.
Select Sketch Objects allows selection of curves and dimensions

in the sketch.
Select Constraints allows selection of constraint symbols in the
graphics window.

Sketching
Constraint Conditions
When either the Dimensions or Constraints option is chosen, the Status line
lists the constraint condition for the active sketch. A sketch may be fully
constrained, under constrained, or over constrained. When the sketch is
under constrained the Status line will indicate the number of constraints
needed.
Sketch needs 4 constraints

Sketch is fully constrained
Sketch contains over constrained geometry 13
A sketch is evaluated each time a constraint is placed upon the sketch. Each
time a sketch is evaluated, the system attempts to solve the set of constraints
that describe how the geometric objects are positioned and their relationships
with each other.
Fully Constrained
In order to completely capture the design intent of a particular profile, it may

be beneficial to fully constrain the sketch. This occurs when the solver is able
to completely define all sketch geometry.
There is no requirement to fully constrain a sketch. The design intent has
been captured sufficiently when the constraint set applied to the profile
causes it to update in the intended manner.
Under Constrained
A sketch is under constrained when there is insufficient information to

completely locate each sketch point. Degree-of-freedom arrows are displayed
at each point that can not be solved to identify the direction in which that
point remains free to move.
Over Constrained
A sketch is over constrained when too much constraint information is

supplied to the solver. For example, if an Equal Length constraint is applied
to two lines and then dimensions are added to each to constrain their length,
the sketch would be over constrained.
The geometry and dimensional constraints that are causing the over
constrained condition are highlighted in a different color to help you identify
and resolve the issue. This color is determined by the Overconstrained Curves
and Dimensions setting in the Sketch Preferences.
An unwanted constraint must be removed before the system will change the
geometric configuration. The sketch remains in the last solved condition.

Sketching
Conflicting Constraints
Dimensional constraints and geometry that are in conflict in the current

configuration with the current constraint set are also highlighted in a
different color. This indicates that the constraint set that has been supplied is
not solvable with the geometry in its current configuration. Constraints may
need to be added or removed in order for the sketcher to be able to solve the
constraint set. The highlight color is determined by the Conflicting Curves
and Dimensions setting in the Sketch Preferences.
13

Sketching
Activity — Adding Constraints
In this activity you will add constraints to the angle adjustment bracket to
cause the expected update to occur when a dimension is modified.
Step 3: Add the required constraints.

Place the cursor over a sketch curve and choose MB3→Edit.
13
Choose the Constraints icon. (Insert→Constraints)

Sketching
Select the line (1) at the bottom of the sketch.
13
Choose Horizontal in the upper left corner of the graphics

window. (MB3→Horizontal)
This constraint will keep the line from rotating around when
dimensions are modified.
There are six places where the curvature transitions need to
maintain tangency.

Sketching
Select the six tangent curve pairs near the six points shown
below, two adjacent curves at a time, and apply aTangent
constraint to each pair. Be careful to select on the correct half
of the arc.
13
Lastly, the two arcs at the top of the slot should remain
concentric.

Sketching
Select the two upper arcs (1) and apply a Concentric constraint.
13
The slot should now be constrained such that the angle may be
adjusted while the configuration remains as intended.
Choose MB2 to turn the Constraints option off.
Step 4: Edit the dimensions.

Double-click on the 45° dimension and change it to 75°.
The sketch geometry changes in the expected manner.

Sketching
Step 5: Apply the change to the solid geometry.
Choose the Update Model icon. (Tools→Update Model)
13

Sketching
Activity — Constraining a Profile
Constrain the pipe vise sketch to satisfy the stated design intent.
Apply constraints to the curves so that the following may be

controlled:
• The outside envelope of the part.
• The included angle of the angled lines.

13
• The angled lines must remain centered in the part horizontally.
• The width of the slot at the bottom of the angled lines is controlled
by the radius at the bottom of the slot.
Step 1: Open pipevise_1.
Step 3: Activate the sketch.
Double-click on a sketch curve.
Step 4: View the system applied constraints.
Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon.

(Tools→Constraints→Show/Remove Constraints)
Choose All In Active Sketch in the List Constraints For: area

of the dialog.

Sketching
Verify the Show Constraints option is set to Explicit.

The system created constraints are now displayed in the list
box. The dialog should look similar to the graphic shown below.
13
Choose the first constraint in the list.

The object referred to in the list is highlighted in the graphics
window. There should be one horizontal line highlighted.
Use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons located to the right of

the list box to browse through the constraint list.
Cancel the Show/Remove Constraints dialog.
Step 5: View the degree of freedom arrows.
Turn on the Constraints icon. (Insert→Constraints)

Sketching
Notice that there are degree of freedom arrows at each of the

sketch points. Even though most of the objects in the sketch have
constraints associated with them, the sketch points are free to
move in all directions. This is because the system cannot locate
any of the points relative to model space.
13
Step 6: Constrain the location of a point.

Select the lower endpoint of the left vertical line.
Select the vertical datum axis.
Choose the Point on Curve icon in the upper left corner

of the graphics window.
The geometry now changes to follow the constraint. The point
at the bottom of the left vertical line is now constrained in the
horizontal direction.
Select the left endpoint of the bottom horizontal line.

Sketching
Select the horizontal datum axis.
Choose the Point on Curve icon.

The geometry now changes to follow the new constraint. The
shared sketch point at the bottom of the left vertical line is now
constrained in both the horizontal and vertical directions. The
degree of freedom arrows go away and, due to the horizontal
and vertical constraints on the lines that share the sketch
point, one of the arrows on the opposite end of those lines has 13
disappeared.
Choose MB2 to cancel the Constraints mode.
Step 7: Move the datum planes and axes to layer 61.

The datums have served their purpose of locating the sketch. You
will now move them to ease selection of objects and clean up the
screen display.
Choose Edit→Object Display.
Choose the Class Selection icon in the upper left corner of the
graphics window.
Choose Type.

Sketching
Choose Datums and choose OK.
Choose Select All and OK.
Key in 61 for the Layer in the dialog and press Enter.
Step 8: Continue adding constraints to satisfy the stated design intent.
13 Turn on the Constraints icon. (Insert→Constraints)
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the two horizontal lines (1)
at the top of the profile.
Choose Collinear and Equal Length.
Use the Esc key to deselect all the curves.

(Edit→Selection→Deselect All).
Select the right side of the arc at the bottom of the slot (1).
Select the short right vertical line (2, but not on the end point).

Sketching
Choose Tangent.
Create another Tangent constraint on the other side of the slot,

selecting the left side of the arc and the left vertical line.
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the bottom horizontal line
and the lower endpoint of the line originating from the arc
center.
13
Choose Point on Curve.
Choose Midpoint.
Use the Esc key to deselect all the curves.

(Edit→Selection→Deselect All).
Select the line (1), shown below, between the midpoint and
the arc center.
Choose Vertical.
Adding dimensional constraints to satisfy the controlling

portions of the design intent will allow the profile to be changed
by modifying the numerical values.

Select the bottom horizontal line. Drag the dimension to

position it and select with MB1 to place it.

Sketching
Key in a value of 5 and press Enter.

Notice the curves change color as they become constrained.
Fit the view if necessary.
Select the left vertical line and place the dimension for it.
Change the value to 3.75.
Select the top left horizontal line and place the dimension.
13 Change its value to .5.
Fit the view if necessary.
Select the left angled line (1) and the top left horizontal line
(2), avoiding the end points. Place the angular dimension and
change its value to 45°.

Sketching
Select the right angled line and the top right horizontal line,
avoiding the end points. Place this angular dimension and
change its value to the ’p’ number assigned to the other angular
dimension.
13
Select the arc at the bottom of the slot. Place the radius
dimension and change its value to .25.
Select the line connecting the arc center and the midpoint
and place this vertical dimension. Change its value to 1.5 and
choose Enter.
The Status line now informs you that the sketch is fully
constrained. Remember that it is not necessarily required
to fully constrain the profile if it is updating in the manner
desired.

Sketching
Step 9: Change the constraints on the sketch to alter the included angle in
the notch.
Click on the first angular dimensional constraint that was
created and change it from a 45° to 30°.
13
Notice that the depth of the notch is unchanged as a result of

this edit. Should that have not been our intent, we would have
to constrain the sketch in a different manner.

Sketching
Activity — Sketching and Constraining a Gasket

In this activity, you will create and constrain a gasket. To efficiently capture
the design intent, constraints and dimensions will be added progressively.
The center hole is the origin of the gasket. The three holes are located
on a horizontal axis. The lines on the outer boundary of the profile
are tangent to the arcs.
13
Step 1: Open the seedpart_in part and save it as ***_gasket_1 where ***
Step 3: Create the sketch on a Datum CSYS.

Change the Work Layer to 21 so that the part will be compliant
with class standards.
Click on the sketch name; key in s21_profile and press Enter.
Choose Datum CSYS.
Choose Absolute CSYS.
Choose OK.

Sketching
The X-Y plane of the Datum CSYS is highlighted as the default

sketch plane.
Choose OK to accept the default plane.
Step 4: Set the Infer Constraint Settings.
13 Choose the Infer Constraint Settings icon.

Verify that the following constraints are turned on.
Concentric
Coincident
Choose OK.
Step 5: Create the circles in the center of the gasket.
Verify that Control Point is turned on in the Snap Point

toolbar.
Select the existing point at the origin of the Datum CSYS.

Sketching
Drag the cursor to preview circle as shown below. Key in a

Diameter value of 2 and press Enter.
13
The first circle is created.
Key in a Diameter value of 3 for the second circle and press

Enter.
Choose MB2.
The two circles are fully constrained because of the dimensional

and geometric constraints that were inferred as you created them.

Sketching
Step 6: Create a circle representing the hole on the left side.
Click and drag to create a circle near on left side of the graphics
window. Key in a Diameter value of 0.5 and press Enter.
13 Choose the Constraints icon. (Insert→Constraints)
Select the arc center of the circle and the horizontal datum axis.
Choose Point on Curve .

Create a perpendicular dimension from the vertical datum

axis to the arc center of the left circle. Change the value of
the dimension to 2.625.
Step 7: Create a circle for the outer boundary on the left side.
Create another circle in the left side of the graphics window
with a diameter of 1.

Sketching
Select the two circles on the left side and choose Concentric.
13
Step 8: Create circles representing the hole and outer boundary on the
right side.
Create two circles on the right side of the graphics window
representing the hole and the outer boundary of the gasket. Do
not explicitly enter the diameter values. You will constrain
them to be equal to existing circles.
Select the two new circles on the right and choose Concentric.

Sketching
Select the arc center of the circles on the right and the
horizontal datum axis and choose Point on Curve.
Select the smaller circle on the left and the smaller circle on
the right and choose Equal Radius.
Select the larger circle on the left and the larger circle on the
13
right and choose Equal Radius.

Create a horizontal dimension from the arc center of the left

circles to the arc center of the right circles. Change the value of
the dimension to 5.25.
Step 9: Set the Infer Constraint Settings before creating the lines.

Disable all constraints except Point on Curve and Tangent.
Choose OK.
Step 10: Create the tangent lines on the outer boundary of the gasket.

Sketching
Choose the Line icon. (Insert→Line)
In the Snap Point toolbar, disable all options except Point on
Curve.
Create the lines by selecting the circles representing the outer

boundary of the gasket. Select the circles by placing the cursor
near the expected tangency. 13
You should see Point on Curve and Tangent constraint symbols

on each end of the lines as they are created.
The Quick Trim option could be used to trim the circles.
However, when extruding the sketch to create a solid
body, it is possible to define the correct boundary of the
gasket without trimming.
Step 11: Choose the Finish Sketch icon.

Sketching
Convert To/From Reference
At times it is useful to add a dimension to a sketch to see the effect of a

change numerically. Adding a dimensional constraint, however, would cause
the sketch to become over constrained. It also may be necessary to add
sketch curves to aid in the construction and constraining of a profile without
representing a portion of the swept feature.
13 To support these needs, curve and dimensional constraints within a sketch

may be converted to and from a Reference status.
• To convert objects, select them in the graphics window and choose Convert
To/From Reference from the MB3 pop-up menu.
• You may access a dialog by choosing the Convert To/From

Reference icon from the Sketch Constraints toolbar
(Tools→Constraints→Convert To/From Reference).
• Reference curves are displayed in a phantom line font and are ignored
during sweep operations.
• Reference curves and dimensions are displayed in colors specified

by the Reference Curves and Reference Dimensions settings in
Preferences→Sketch→Colors.
• Reference dimensional constraints are displayed with only the value

portion of the expression. The values will be updated as the sketch is
changed, but they do control the sketch geometry with which they are
associated.
Dimensions can be made reference as they are created by choosing
Create Reference Dimension in the icon option bar.

Sketching
Activity — Constraint Conditions

In this activity, you will constrain and edit a simple sketch to change the
design intent. This configuration is not one that you would likely sketch, but
its simplicity illustrates the concept of an over-constrained condition.
Apply constraints to control the length and width of the sketch. The
shape of the sketch should remain rectangular.
13
Step 1: Open seedpart_in.
Step 3: Create a sketch on Layer 21.

Change the work layer to 21.
Choose Datum CSYS.
Choose Absolute CSYS.
Choose OK.
The X-Y plane of the Datum CSYS is highlighted as the default
sketch plane.
Choose OK.

Sketching
Choose the Infer Constraints Settings icon.

Verify that the following constraints are turned on.

Horizontal
Vertical
13 Parallel
Perpendicular
Coincident
Choose OK.
Step 5: Create a rectangle.
Choose the Rectangle icon. (Insert→Rectangle)
Verify that Control Point is turned on in the Snap Point

toolbar.

Sketching
Drag the cursor to preview the rectangle and select a cursor

location near the upper right corner of the graphics window.
13
Step 6: Interrogate the constraints that currently exist for this sketch.
Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon.

(Tools→Constraints→Show/Remove Constraints)
Choose All In Active Sketch.
Set the Show Constraints to Explicit.
Highlight the first constraint in the list and use the down
arrow button to browse the constraints.
Choose Cancel.
Step 7: Apply dimensional constraints to control the length and width of

the rectangle as per the design intent.

Sketching

Select the left vertical line and place the dimension. Change
the value to 2.75.
Select the bottom horizontal line and place the dimension.

Change the value to 4.5.
13
As dimensional constraints are being created, the
degree-of-freedom arrows are eliminated and the curves change to
the fully constrained color. The sketch is fully constrained with one
vertical and one horizontal dimensional constraint, along with the
geometric constraints inferred when the lines were constructed.
Design Change — Modify the sketch so that it can be
controlled by the angle and length of a diagonal line.
Step 8: Create a diagonal line in the sketch and convert it to reference.
Choose the Line icon. (Insert→Line)
In the Snap Point toolbar, disable all options except Control
Point.
Select the lower left endpoint and the upper right endpoint of
the rectangle to define the line.
Step 9: Convert the diagonal line to Reference status.

Sketching
Choose MB2 to exit the line creation mode.
Select the diagonal line.
Choose MB3→Convert To/From Reference.
Step 10: Apply an angular dimensional constraint.

13
Select the lower horizontal line (not the endpoint) and the
diagonal line (not the endpoint). Indicate a location for the
angular dimension and change the value to 35°.
The Status line indicates that sketch is now over constrained.
The sketch objects associated with the over constrained
condition change to the color specified by the Overconstrained
Curves and Dimensions setting in the Sketch Preferences.
To correct the over constrained condition, one or more of the
offending constraints must by removed. The new design intent
is to control the sketch with angular and diagonal length
dimensions.

Sketching
Step 11: Apply a parallel dimensional constraint.

Select the diagonal line and place a parallel dimension. Change
the value of the dimension to 6.5.
13
Notice that the sketch configuration does not change when the
value is modified. The system leaves the geometry in its last
solved state until the over constrained condition is resolved.
Step 12: Convert sketch dimensions to reference.

Choose MB2 to exit the dimension creation mode.
Select the horizontal and vertical dimensions.
Choose MB3→Convert To/From Reference.

The sketch is returned to a fully constrained condition. The
reference dimensions reflect the value only. They do not control
the geometry to which they are attached.
The over constrained condition could also have been resolved
by deleting the horizontal and vertical dimensions.

Sketching
Summary
This lesson introduced the concept of sketch creation.
Sketches may be used to define a base feature, guide paths, and additional
associative features to the base feature.
A sketch parametrically controls curves. It can also be defined on a sketch
plane which is associative to a datum plane/face of a model. Both of these
benefits allow you to capture and maintain design intent.
Constraints are applied to sketch objects in order to capture the design intent. 13
The level of constraint, partial or full, is determined by the design intent
and what is necessary to capture it.
In this lesson you:
• Created sketches on datum planes, solid faces, and a Datum CSYS.
• Created freehand curves in a sketch.
• Created and edited dimensional constraints.
• Created inferred and explicit geometric constraints.
• Converted sketch curves and dimensions to reference status.

13
Lesson
14 Swept Features and Boolean

Operations
Purpose
This lesson introduces Swept Features and Boolean Operations.

14
Objectives

• Create an extruded feature.
• Create an extruded feature with offsets.
• Create a feature by sweeping a profile along a guide string.
• Create a revolved feature.

Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Types of Swept Features

Swept features are created by extruding, revolving, or sweeping a section
string. The section string may be composed of explicit curves, sketch curves,
solid edges, solid faces, and sheet bodies.
An Extruded feature is produced by sweeping the section string (1) in a linear
direction for a specified distance.
14 A Revolved feature is produced by rotating a section string (1) around a

specified axis (2).
A Sweep Along Guide feature is produced by sweeping a section string (1)

along a guide string (2).
The features/bodies that are created will be associated with both the section
string and the guide string.

Extrude
The Extrude option (Insert→Design Feature→Extrude) allows a feature to be
created by sweeping planar, section string geometry in a linear direction for
a specified distance.
Extruding a Sketch
A sketch can easily be extruded using an object/action approach by placing

the cursor over it in the graphics window and choosing the Extrude option in
the MB3 pop-up menu.
The Start and End extrude distances can then be specified by using the drag
handles or by keying in values in the dynamic input boxes. The Start drag
handle is represented by a sphere (1) and the End drag handle is represented 14
by a cone (2).

The Extrude dialog is displayed and provides a single user interface to specify
Limits, Offset, Draft, and Boolean operation for an extrusion.
14
Selecting Sketches Using Selection Intent
When you use Extrude, the Selection Intent toolbar is available to establish
rules for selecting a section string.
You may or may not want to use all of the curves in the sketch as the section
string. To select all of the curves in a sketch in one step, set the Curve option
in the Selection Intent toolbar to Any or Feature Curves. The other rules can
be applied to select a single sketch curve or other collections of sketch curves.

Extruding a partial sketch is a technique that is used when one sketch may
define multiple features.
14

Rules for Extruding Section String Objects
The Body Type option which is found in the Extrude dialog and in
Preferences→Modeling, controls whether a solid body or a sheet body is
created when extruding section string geometry. When set to "Solid" the
following rules will apply:
• Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves creates a solid body.
14
• Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves with another closed set
within the boundary of the first creates a solid with an interior hole.
• Extruding a curve or set of planar connected curves which are not closed
creates a sheet body unless offsets are used.

Activity — Starting the Draglink
In this activity, you will start to create a model for a draglink by extruding a
sketch.
14
Step 1: Open the swept_draglink_1 part and save it as ***_draglink_1

where *** represents your initials.
Step 3: Extrude the sketch.

Place the cursor over one of the sketch curves and choose
MB3→Extrude.
The default direction for the extrude is normal to the sketch
plane in the +ZC direction.
Double-click the direction vector in the graphics window so

that it is pointing in the –ZC direction.
Key in 152.5 for the End value.

Choose OK (MB2).
14

Boolean Operations
Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more
existing solid bodies. If a solid already exists in the part, a Boolean operation
can be specified in the Extrude dialog to combine the new feature with the
existing solid body instead of creating it as a separate solid body.
1 — Create
2 — Unite
3 — Subtract
4 — Intersect
14
Boolean operations may also be created as separate features by choosing the

Unite, Subtract, and Intersect options in the Feature Operation toolbar or by
choosing Insert→Combine Bodies. When using these operations, you must
select a Target solid and at least one Tool solid.
Creating the Boolean operations as separate features allows you to

apply additional edits to them such as suppress and unsuppress.
Defining Target and Tool Solids

The Target solid is the solid body on which the operations are executed.
The Tool solid is the solid body that operates upon the target solid.
The target solid passes its attributes on to the Boolean operation
result. Therefore, the resultant solid inherits the Layer, Material
Density, etc. of the target solid.

Unite
This option produces one solid body by defining a target solid (1) and tool
solid (2).
14
Subtract
This option allows material to be removed from a target solid (1) by using
another solid as the tool solid (2), leaving empty space where the tool solid
existed.

Intersect
This option results in a solid occupying the volume common to the selected
target solid (1) and tool solid (2).
14
Boolean Errors
If you attempt to unite a tool solid within a target solid and there is no change
in topology, the following message appears.
If you attempt to unite, subtract, or intersect a tool solid with a target solid
and the two solids do not touch, the following message appears.

If you attempt to subtract a tool solid (1) from a target solid and the operation
would produce a zero thickness (2), the following message appears.
14

Start and End Limit Options
Options are available to control the Start and End Limits of the extrusion by
using existing geometry as well as keying in values.
Value Key in a numeric value or a formula for the limit.

Symmetric Value If the extrusion is symmetric about the section
string, this option can be used so that only one of
the limit values has to be entered.
Until Next Extend the extrusion to the next body along the
direction path.
Until Selected Extend the extrusion to a selected face, datum
plane, or body.
Until Extended Trim the extrusion to a selected face when the
section curves extend beyond its edges.
Through All Extend the extrusion completely through all 14
selectable bodies along the path.
These options are also available in an MB3 pop-up menu in the

graphics window when you highlight the start or end limit drag
handle.

Extrude with Offset

This option is used to apply offsets to an extrusion.
When this option is turned on, the dialog expands to let you specify Start and
End offset values. Drag handles (1) and a dynamic input boxes are displayed
with the extrusion preview. The Start offset handle is represented by a sphere
and the End offset handle is represented by a cone. Turn the Offset option off
to remove the offset and handles from the preview.
14

Offset Examples
The values of the Start Offset and End Offset may be positive or negative.
The positive direction is determined by the direction of the End Offset drag
handle (cone).
Start Offset Zero

End Offset Positive
Start Offset Zero

End Offset Negative
14
Start Offset Negative

End Offset Positive

Extrude with Draft
When this option is turned on, the dialog is expanded to let you specify a
draft angle. A drag handle (1) and a dynamic input field are displayed with
the extrusion preview. Turn the option off to remove the draft and drag
handle from the preview.
14
Rules for Extruding with Draft
• A positive taper angle creates an inward taper (A).
• A negative angle creates an outward taper (B).
• If the section string included interior holes, the holes would be tapered
in the opposite direction to the outside objects.

Activity — Extruding with Offsets
In this activity, extruded features will be added to a part using offset values.
14
Step 1: Open the swept_extrude_1 part.
Step 3: Create a tube by extruding with an offset.
Choose the Extrude icon.

(Insert→Design Feature→Extrude)
Select the inside, large circle as the section string.
Change the Boolean option to Unite.
Confirm a value of 0 for the Start (Limit), key in 2.5 for the End
(Limit) value, and press Enter.

Turn the Offset option on.
Key in –.25 for the End (Offset) value and press Enter.
If the Offset drag handle is pointing away from the center of
the part, use a negative value for the End offset. If the Offset
drag handle is pointing toward the center of the part, use a
positive value.
Fit the view. (MB3→Fit).

The circle is extruded from its origin normal to its creation
plane a distance of 2.5 units. The feature is .25 units thick
14 measured inside the circle. The thickness was defined by
the End offset value based on the direction of the offset drag
handle.
Step 4: Create a flange at the top of the cylinder.

Verify the Curve option is set to Single Curve in the Selection

Intent toolbar..
Select the top outer edge of the cylindrical extrusion.
14
Change the Boolean option to Unite.
Make sure the drag handle is pointing down. If it is pointing
up, choose Reverse Direction in the dialog.
Key in .25 for the End (Limit) value and press Enter.
Key in .25 for the End (Offset) value and press Enter.
the part, use a positive value for the End offset. If the Offset
drag handle is pointing toward the center of the part, use a
negative value.

14
The selected edge is extruded from its origin, normal to its creation
plane to a distance .25 units. The feature is defined as being .25
units thick measured outside the edge. The thickness was defined
by the values entered in the End Offset fields relative to direction
of the offset drag handle.
Step 5: Subtract an extrusion from the flange.

Select the inside circular edge shown to extrude.

Change the Boolean option to Subtract.
Make sure the direction vector is pointing down. If it is

pointing up, double-click the vector in the graphics window or
choose Reverse Direction in the dialog.
Key in .075 for the End (Limit) value and press Enter.
Key in .15 for the Start (Offset) value and .275 for the End
(Offset) value and press Enter.
14
the part, use positive values for the offsets. If the Offset drag
handle is pointing toward the center of the part, use negative
values.
Choose OK.

Selection Intent
The Selection Intent toolbar is available to specify curve and edge selection
rules for section strings when creating extruded features. These rules can be
applied to automatically select a collection of curves or edges in a single step
instead of selecting them individually.
Curve Options
When a feature requires the selection of a profile or individual curves and

edges, the Curve options become available for collecting and section building.
The pull-down menu displays the curve or edge selection rules that are
applicable to the feature you are creating.
The cursor changes to a Curve Collecting mode, indicating you can collect
14 curves or edges. Choose the rule from the pull-down menu that best describes
the action for the design intent of your feature.
Any — Lets you use the original default intent method to extend a
selection. The default method can vary based on the type of object you
selected. For example, with Extrude the default could be All Curves of
Feature if a curve is selected, and Single if the selected object is an edge.
The Any method lets the controlling feature derive intent based on the
type of object selected.
Single Curve — Lets you single-select one or more curves or edges. No

rule is applied to a collection of singly-selected curves, and it is basically
a simple list of objects without intent. You can enhance a collection of
singly-selected curves or edges by moving MB3 over one of the selected
objects and then choosing another rule.
Connected Curves — Lets you select a chain of curves or edges that share
endpoints. No rule is applied if the chained curves are non-associative.
The curve intent does not attempt to grow or shrink the chain if curves
are added or no longer form a single chain after an edit to the model.

Tangent Curves — Lets you select a tangent continuous chain of curves

or edges. No rule is applied if the chained curves are non-associative.
The curve intent does not attempt to grow or shrink the chain if curves
are added or no longer form a single chain after an edit to the model.
The system does not discard non-associative curves that are no longer
tangent after an edit.
Face Edges — Collects all edges of the face containing the edge you
select. If you already selected an edge using another rule, you can select
an adjoining face to define a collection with the Add All of Face rule.
When you select an edge, the cursor-center location determines which
face is selected.
Sheet Edges — Collects all laminar edges of the sheet body you select.
Feature Curves — Collects all output curves from curve features, such as
14
sketches or any other curve features.
Stop at Intersection
Select this option to specify that auto chaining stops not only at endpoints of
the curve or edge but also on intersections with other curves or edges. When
you select a chain, all other curves and edges visible in the selection view are
checked for intersections with the current chain. At each of the intersection
points (that is, where two or more objects meet at a point, either interior or at
an end point) the system bounds the chain.
Follow Fillet
You can use this option to automatically chain a section onto and off of a
tangent arc. This option is available only when you are building a section,
and only for Connected Curves and Tangent Curves chaining intents. If you
select both Follow Fillet and Stop At Intersections, Follow Fillet overrides
Stop At Intersections at branches where it applies

More Selection Intent Options
This option displays a dialog with other special conditions for the selected
rule.
14 Chain Between — Select this option to determine the number of objects

you must select for chaining.
When you clear this option, chaining is a single selection operation and
you select a seed object and all objects that meet the current constraints
(that is, the Chain or Chain Tangent options) are collected.
When you select this option, chaining is a two selection operation and you
must select the start and end of the chain before the chain is collected.
This option is mutually exclusive of the Stop at Intersection option. If
you select one, the other is cleared.
Tangent Angle (Degrees) — Use this option to enter a real number for the
highest possible value you want to specify as tangent degrees.

Activity — Extruding Using Selection Intent
In this activity, you will use Selection Intent options to extrude a sketch.
Step 1: Open the swept_gasket_1 part.

The part contains a sketch of a gasket profile. The circles defining
the outer boundary of the profile were not trimmed.
14
Step 3: Extrude the sketch.
Choose the Extrude icon. (Insert→Design

Feature→Extrude)
Turn the Enable Preview option off.
Set the Curve option to Tangent Curves in the Selection Intent

toolbar.
Turn on the Follow Fillet icon in the Selection Intent

toolbar.

Select one of the curves in the outer boundary of the gasket.

The outer boundary of the gasket is highlighted.
Select the three interior circles that define the holes.
14
Change the work view to the Trimetric orientation.

(MB3→Orient View→Trimetric).
Turn the Enable Preview option on.
Key in the following values for the extrusion:
Start (Limit) = 0
End (Limit) = .125
Choose OK. (MB2)

Sweep Along Guide

The Sweep along Guide option (Insert→Sweep→Sweep along Guide) allows a
feature to be created by sweeping a section string along a guide string.
Rules for Sweeping Section String Objects Along a Guide

• Solid or sheet bodies are created based on the current Modeling
Preferences Body Type setting and the closure condition of the curves
(i.e. open string or closed string).
Open String Closed String
14
• An open section string swept along a guide path that forms an enclosed
loop will automatically cap the end faces, providing the Modeling
Preferences Body Type is set to Solid.
• Open section strings will always be swept into a solid body when using
the sweep with offset option.
• Only one Section String and only one Guide String may be selected.

Guide Strings Containing Sharp Corners
When using Sweep along Guide where the guide string contains sharp
corners, it is recommended that the section string be placed away from a
sharp corner. The section string also needs to be located on an end point of
one of the guide string objects.
1 — Guide String.
2 — Section String that is at sharp corner, a location that should
be avoided.
3 — Section String that is located away from a sharp corner and
located on an end point.
4 — Two separate line objects that provide the endpoint for the
section string.
14

Activity — Sweeping Along an Open Guide String
In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part by sweeping a
section string along a guide.
14
Step 1: Make ***_draglink_1 the work part.
Step 3: Create the swept feature.

Make layer 22 the work layer and all other layers invisible.
Choose the Sweep along Guide icon.

(Insert→Sweep→Sweep along Guide)
Set the Curve option to Feature Curves in the Selection Intent

toolbar.

Select one of the I-beam sketch curves as the section string (1).
The I-beam is a sketch feature so all of the curves in the I-beam
are selected except the reference line.
14
Choose OK. (MB2)
Verify that the Curve option to Feature Curves in the Selection

Intent toolbar.
Select one of the curves from the sketch on layer 23 as the

guide string (2).
Choose OK. (MB2)
Verify that the First Offset and Second Offset are both set
to 0 (zero).
Choose OK. (MB2)

Choose Create.
14
Cancel the Sweep along Guide dialog.
Step 4: Unite the new swept solid with the existing solid.
Make layer 1 the work layer.
Choose the Unite icon. (Insert→Combine Bodies→Unite)
Select the first solid body created as the target body.
Select the swept I-beam body as the tool body.

Choose OK. (MB2)
14

Activity — Sweeping Along a Closed Guide String
In this activity, you will sweep an open section string along a closed guide
string to create a solid body.
14
Step 1: Open the swept_guide_1 part.
Step 3: Create the swept feature.
Choose the Sweep along Guide icon.

(Insert→Sweep→Sweep along Guide)
Verify the Curve option is set to Feature Curves in the

Selection Intent toolbar.
Select the sketch of the open profile (1) as the section string.
Choose OK. (MB2)

Select the sketch of the closed profile (2) as the guide string.
14 Choose OK. (MB2)
Choose OK to accept the direction. (MB2)
Verify that the First Offset and Second Offset are set to 0
(zero).
Choose OK. (MB2)

The open section string was swept along the full length of the
guide string and the system automatically caps the open ends
to produce a solid body.
The Sweep along Guide function may be used to sweep any

section string along a guide string.

Step 4: Optional Challenge — Undo the creation of the solid and create
it again specifying a .25 single offset toward the outside of the
curves. The part should resemble the figure shown below.
14

Revolve
The Revolve option (Insert→Design Feature→Revolve) allows you to create a
feature by rotating a section string about an axis through specified angles.
The Revolve feature requires a section (1), a location and direction for the
rotation axis (2), and Start and End angles (3,4). The angles can be specified
by using drag handles, keying in values in the dynamic input boxes, or in
a dialog.
14
You can also revolve a sketch by placing the cursor over it in the
graphics window and choosing the Revolve option in the MB3 pop-up
menu.

The Revolve dialog is displayed and provides a single user interface to specify
Angular Limits, Offset, and a Boolean operation.
14
Rules for Revolving Section String Objects
• As with extruded sections, a solid or sheet body is created based on the

closure condition of the curves and Body Type setting. The Body Type
setting is found under Preferences→Modeling but can also be set in the
Revolve dialog (after choosing the More Options icon).
• When revolving an open section string a full 360°, the end faces will be
automatically capped to produce a solid body if the Body Type option is
set to Solid.
• The Right Hand rule determines the direction of the sweep. You can
reverse the direction by double-clicking on the axis vector in the graphics
window or by choosing the Reverse Direction icon in the dialog.

Activity — Creating Revolved Features

In this activity, you will create revolved features.
Step 1: Open the swept_revolve_1 part.
The part contains a sketch to be used as the section string and a
datum axis to be used as the axis of revolution.
Step 3: Revolve an open section string.

Place the cursor over the sketch and choose MB3→Revolve.
14
Key in the following values for the Angular Limits:
Start = 0
End = 360
Choose MB2.
Select the Datum Axis in the graphics window.
Choose OK (MB2).
A solid revolved body is created from the open section string.
If you wanted to create a solid body with a sweep of less than
360°, the section string must be closed or offsets must be
specified.

Step 4: Revolve an open section string with an offset.

Now, you will use the same section string to create a new revolved
body using an offset to form a shell.
Choose Undo. (MB3→Undo or Ctrl-Z)
Place the cursor over the sketch again and choose

MB3→Revolve.
Turn the Offset option on in the Revolve dialog.
Start (Limit) = 0
End (Limit) = 180 14
Start (Offset) = 0
End (Offset) = .25
Choose MB2.
Select the Datum Axis in the graphics window.
Choose OK. (MB2)
Notice that the revolution starts at the plane of the curves and
revolves in a counterclockwise direction with respect to the
positive axis of rotation (the Datum Axis). The Right Hand
Rule for Positive Rotation applies.
Step 5: Revolve a solid face.

Now, you will close one end of the solid by revolving the edges of an
existing face.

Choose the Revolve icon.

(Insert→Design Feature→Revolve)
Set the Curve option to Face Edges in the Selection Intent

toolbar.
Select the solid face (1) as shown.
14
Start Angle = 0
End Angle = –90
Choose MB2.
Select the short edge, as shown below, as the inferred rotation

axis vector.
Choose OK. (MB2)
Step 6: Unite the new revolved solid body with the existing solid body.

Select the target (1) and tool solid (2) as shown below.
14
Choose OK. (MB2)
Step 7: Optional Challenge — This shell is one of two molded parts that
must fit together. Add a lip to the outside edge of the part by
extending the outside edges of the top planar face with an offset
value and height value equal to half the shell thickness.
Step 8: Close the part and do not save.

Activity — Adding a Revolved Feature to the Draglink

In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part by adding a
revolved feature.
Step 1: Make ***_draglink_1 the work part.
14
Step 3: Revolve a section string (1) to create a feature (2).

Make layer 24 selectable to view the section string (1) and make
all other layers invisible. Layer 1 will remain the work layer.
Choose the Revolve icon.

(Insert→Design Feature→Revolve)

Verify the Curve option is set to either Any or Feature Curves

in the Selection Intent toolbar.
Select the sketch (1) shown below as the section string.
14
Choose MB2.
Select the vertical line shown (2) to define the vector for the
axis of revolution.
Start Angle = 0
End Angle = 360
Choose OK. (MB2)

Step 4: Unite the new revolved solid body with the existing solid body.
Select the existing solid body as the target body.
Select the new revolved solid body as the tool body.
Choose OK. (MB2)
14

Activity — Extruding to a Face
In this activity you will complete the development of the draglink part.
Step 1: Make sure ***_draglink_1 is the work part.
14
Step 2: Extrude a section string to a face.

Make layer 25 selectable and all other layers invisible. Layer 1
should still be the work layer.
The section string geometry (1) is now visible.
Choose the Extrude icon.

(Insert→Design Feature→Extrude)
Verify the Curve option is set to Any or Feature Curves in the

Selection Intent toolbar.

Select the sketch (1) as the section string.
14 Change the Boolean option to Subtract.
Choose Reverse Direction so that the drag handle points

down into the existing solid.
Verify the Start (Limit) value is set to 0.
Change the End (Limit) option to Until Next.
The length of the extrusion is determined by the first face it

intersects which is the bottom face of the part.

Choose OK. (MB2)
14
Step 3: Save and close the part.

Summary
Swept features are created by extruding, revolving, or sweeping a section
string. The section string may be composed of sketch curves, explicit curves,
solid edges, solid faces, and sheet bodies.
Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more
existing solid bodies.
In this lesson you:
• Created extruded features.
• Created an extruded feature with offsets.
• Created a feature by sweeping a section string along a guide.

14
• Created a revolved feature.
• Applied boolean operations.

Lesson
15 Editing the Model
Purpose
To modify solid body features by editing their defining criteria.
Objectives
In this lesson, you will:

• Edit feature parameters and positioning dimensions.
• Delete features.
15
• Reorder features in the Model History.
• Reattach a feature to a different face.
• Move features.
• Rename a feature.

Editing the Model
Accessing the Options to Edit Features

There are several different ways to access options to edit features in NX.
• Part Navigator — Many feature editing options are available in the Part
Navigator. You may also use it to review the Model History and feature
dependencies.
• Feature MB3 Pop-up Menu — Some common feature editing options

are available in the MB3 pop-up menu when you select a feature in the
graphics window. The options available in this menu will depend on the
type of feature and the method used to create it.
• Edit Pull-Down Menu — Choosing Edit→Feature from the menu bar

provides many options related to editing features. If you choose an editing
options from this menu without first selecting a feature, a dialog will be
displayed so that you can select features from a list.
• Edit Feature Toolbar — Many of the options in the Edit→Feature

pull-down menu are also available in the Edit Feature toolbar. This
15 toolbar can be turned on and customized to display the icons of frequently
used editing options.

Editing the Model
Part Navigator
The Part Navigator allows various actions to be performed on features.

Holding down MB3 on a feature node in the Part Navigator displays a feature
specific pop-up menu offering pertinent editing options.
To access the Part Navigator, choose the icon on the resource bar on the right
side of the NX window.
15
The options available in the pop-up menu will vary depending on the
type of feature selected. Many of the options are not available if the
Modeling application is not active.

Editing the Model
Display Dimensions
Choosing Display Dimensions causes the feature’s parameter values to be

displayed (just as they are with Edit Parameters). The temporary display
remains until a Refresh is performed.
Show/Hide
Allows the body or parents for the selected feature to be hidden or displayed.
This function blanks/unblanks the object(s) and their display can be brought
back by using the Show/Hide options or the options under Edit→Blank.
The Hide Body option "blanks" the solid body that the feature is applied to.
The Hide Parents option is more applicable to swept features. If the Hide
Parents option is used on a swept feature, the system will hide (blank) the
parent curves which generated the swept feature. If the swept feature is
derived by a solid edge(s) then the Hide Parents option will hide (blank) the
parent solid body. This option is not effective in showing or hiding "resulting
curves," which are produced directly from a curve feature operation, such
as with Offset Curve.
15
Make Current Feature
Provides a quick and easy method for inserting features into a part. This
option may be used to make an existing feature the current feature of the
solid body, and then add more features at that point in the model history. If
this option is used on a feature whose time stamp positions it in the middle of
the model history, making it the current feature, all of the features after it
become inactive. As new features are created they are inserted into the build
hierarchy before the inactive features.
Filter
Lets you apply a system filter to the Part Navigator display tree based on the
features currently selected. These filters let you simplify the display tree by
hiding features by type or timestamp order.
To turn off a filter, place the cursor in the Part Navigator away from a
feature node, click MB3, and turn off the Apply Filter option in the
pop-up menu.
Edit Parameters
Lets you edit the feature’s parameters (same as Edit→Feature→Parameters).

Editing the Model
Edit with Rollback

This option first rolls the model back to its state just prior to the feature being
created, before reopening the feature’s creation dialog to edit parameters.
This is shown in bold in the pop-up menu which indicates it is the default
action when you double-click on a feature name in the Part Navigator.
Edit Positioning
Lets you edit the feature’s positioning dimensions (same as
Edit→Feature→Edit Positioning)
Suppress and Unsuppress

Suppress temporarily removes the feature from the body and display. This
can also be accomplished by clearing the checkbox associated with the feature
node in the Part Navigator. The option changes to Unsuppress while a feature
is suppressed. Unsuppress returns the suppressed feature back to the body
and the display.
Reorder Before/After
Allows the construction order of the features in the model to be altered by
15
positioning the selected feature before or after other features in the build
hierarchy. Choose the feature that the selected node is to be reordered
relative to from the Reorder Before or Reorder After cascade menus.
Nodes may also be dragged and dropped in the Part Navigator window to
perform a feature reorder. Multiple features may be selected by holding the
Ctrl key down during selection.
Group
Same as Format→Group Features. This option lets you group features into
a special collection called a Feature Set. Members of a Feature Set can be
controlled together during suppress, delete and move feature operations.
Choosing Group causes the Sets of Features dialog to appear. The features
included in the Feature Set can also be hidden so they do not show in the Part
Navigator and can only be accessed under the Feature Set Name.
If you delete a Feature Set, all of its member features are also deleted.
To delete a Feature Set without deleting its members, first remove
the members from the set.
Replace
This allows a feature’s definition to be replaced or "redefined" by another
feature. For example, a surface that is used as a trim face could be replaced
for a different surface without having to delete or redefine several other
features. For more information on replace see the technical documentation.

Editing the Model
Rename
This option allows you to append a user-defined name to the feature. The user
defined name will appear in addition to the system defined name in the Part
Navigator (i.e. Simple Hole(6) “Alignment Hole”).
Delete
Deletes the selected feature (same as Edit→Delete).
Object Dependency Browser
The Object Dependency Browser allows the parent and child relationships of
a feature to be interrogated.
Information
Provides information about the selected feature in the Information window.
Properties
15 This option provides access to General and Attribute information for the
feature selected. General properties include the feature name, which can be
edited similarly to the Rename function. Attributes can be added to any
feature to include information which could be called out in a specified column
of the Part Navigator. For more information on feature attributes and Part
Navigator columns see the technical documentation.

Editing the Model
Deleting Features
You can delete features by selecting the feature and choosing Delete from the
MB3 pop-up menu. The feature can be selected in the graphics window or
Part Navigator.
If you choose the Delete icon from the Standard toolbar (or Edit→Delete), an
icon options bar is displayed in upper left corner of the graphics window.
Choosing the Features icon allows you to select features to delete
• When a feature is deleted from a body, the space it occupied or voided is

filled in exactly as it was before the feature was created.
15
• If a feature is mistakenly deleted, Undo (Edit→Undo List or Ctrl-Z) may
be used immediately after the deletion to restore the feature.
• Any features whose placement, not position, is dependent on the deleted

feature will also be deleted. For example, if a hole was created using a
datum plane for its placement face, and the datum plane is deleted, the
hole will also be deleted.
A Notification dialog will be displayed to warn you that other features
will be affected. Choosing the Information button will list the dependent
features.

Editing the Model
Update Failures
When an edit is made to a feature, the model is updated (or rebuilt) to
incorporate this change. Sometimes the edit may cause a failure in a feature
that occurs later in the model history. The Edit During Update dialog will
appear if an update failure occurs and allow you to resolve the problem.
In the example below, an edit was made to a Shell feature that results in the
removal of an edge that is later blended. After the edit is made, the blend
fails during the model update and the Edit During Update dialog appears.
15
The options that allow you to advance forward through the model history
(Step, Step To, and Continue) are disabled until the failure is resolved and the
feature successfully updates. You may delete, suppress, or edit the current
feature or step back and edit an earlier feature.

Editing the Model
Additional Edit During Update Options

Some of the options in the Edit During Update dialog apply specifically to
update failures.
Accept — used to acknowledge a single warning message about a failed

feature (but not an error message) to allow the update to continue. The
feature that fails is marked "out of date" in the Part Navigator.
The status of features may also be viewed by choosing Information→Feature.

15
The features that are “out of date” are listed with a (!) in the Feature Browser.
Accept Remaining — acknowledges the update failures of the current

feature as well as all subsequent features so that each warning message does
not have to be accepted individually.
Show Failure Area — temporarily displays failed geometry. This option is
available only if an object involved in the failure, such as a tool body, is
available for display.

Editing the Model
Show Current Model — displays the part of the model that has been
successfully rebuilt.
For performance reasons, the display does not change during update
when an update method other than Show Current Model is used.
After the model update has finished, the display is updated.
Post Recovery Update Status — specifies what should happen after an edit
is made during an update failure.
• Continue — restarts the automatic update process from where it left off.
• Pause — stops at the next feature after an edit is made and lets you
choose other Edit during Update options, rather than automatically
resuming the update.
15

Editing the Model
Activity — Edit and Delete Features

In this activity, you will edit the parameters of a feature, capture design
intent by associating a positioning dimension to another feature, and delete a
feature.
Step 2: Start the Modeling application. 15

Step 3: Review the model.
Choose the Part Navigator icon from the resource bar.
Choose the push pin icon in the upper right corner to

permanently display the Part Navigator.
Select some of the features in the Part Navigator and view

what highlights in the graphics window.
Step 4: Edit the width of the part.

Double-click the Extrude(4) feature in the Part Navigator.
(Edit→Feature→Edit with Rollback)
The model “rolls back” to the state it was in when the Extrude
feature was created. The Extrude dialog is also displayed.
Change the End value to 2.75.

Editing the Model
Choose OK. (MB2)

After the update, the pad on the bottom is no longer centered.
The design intent is that the pad should always remain in the
center of the part.
This situation will be remedied in the next step.
Step 5: Edit a positioning dimension of the pad by selecting it in the

graphics window.
15 In the graphics window, place the cursor over the rectangular

pad shown in the above figure (Rectangular Pad(7)) and choose
In the graphics window, select the p29=1.560 expression.

To see the pad feature and expressions better, the view may
need to be rotated.
Since the pad should always stay in the center of the part,
keying in a simple equation will capture this aspect of the
design intent.
Key in p11/2.
The expression p11 is the End value of the Extrude feature and
controls the width of the part.
Choose MB2 three times.

Editing the Model

In the graphics window, place the cursor over the Extrude
feature at the location as shown below.
Place the cursor over the Extrude feature at the location as

shown below and choose MB3→Edit Parameters.
If you have difficulty selecting the feature, wait until

the QuickPick indicator appears, click MB1 and select 15
Extrude(4) in the QuickPick dialog.
Change the End value to 5.00 and choose OK. (MB2)

The pad feature remains in the center of the block.
Step 7: Delete a feature.

Editing the Model
Place the cursor over the T Slot feature and choose

MB3→Delete.
A Notification dialog appears informing you that other features

will be affected.
Choose Information from the dialog to list the other features

15 that will be deleted.
The three holes will be deleted because faces of the slot were
used as their placement face or thru face.
Choose OK.
The T Slot and the dependent hole features are removed.

Editing the Model
Activity — Using the Update Tool

In this activity, you will make an edit to a feature which causes an update
failure. You will resolve the problem using the Edit during Update dialog.
15

Double-click the Extrude(4) feature in the Part Navigator.
(Edit→Feature→Edit with Rollback)
Change the End value to 1.75.

Editing the Model
Choose OK (MB2).
The Edit during Update dialog appears.
15
The feature that has caused the failure to occur is shown in the
graphics window.
Choose Show Current Model.

The model appears in the graphics window relative to the new
1.75 width value.

Editing the Model
Choose Show Failure Area.

The reason for the failure is now evident. The hole is positioned
outside the solid body.
Choose Edit in the Edit During Update dialog.

15
Choose Edit Position.
Select the p63=2.125 dimension from the graphics window.
Key in p11-.5 and choose OK (MB2) four times.

The hole is now located within the solid model and resolves the
problem. The update completes successfully.

Editing the Model
Activity — Reordering Features with the Part Navigator

In this activity, you will reorder features to see how this impacts the design
of the part.
Step 1: Open the edit_reorder_1 part.
15
Step 3: Review the model.
Choose the push pin icon in the upper right corner to

Select some of the features in the Part Navigator and view

what highlights in the graphics window.
Step 4: Reorder the Shell feature.

Editing the Model
Place the cursor over Shell(3) feature in the Part Navigator,

press and hold down MB1, drag the feature just below Unite(5).
The hollow feature is reordered after the other extruded
feature is united.
15
Press and hold down MB1 on Shell(5) and drag the feature
just below Blend(6).
Notice the sharp corners on the inside of the part.

Editing the Model
Press and hold down MB1 on Shell(6) and drag the feature
just below Blend(7).
Now there is a radius on the inside edges.
15
Step 5: Rename a Feature.

Select the Blend(5) feature in the Part Navigator and choose
MB3→Rename.
Key in Throat Blend and press Enter.

The new name is appended to the system-defined name in the
Part Navigator. This can make the feature easier to identify
when reordering or reviewing the model.

Editing the Model
Delaying Model Updates
Delayed Update After Edit
As more features are added to a model, the model will take longer to update.
If you are making several minor edits to a complex model with many features,
it may be beneficial to control when the model is updated. Instead of waiting
for the model to update after each edit, you can delay the updates until after
all edits are specified.
To delay model updates, choose Tools→Update→Delayed after Edit. If this
is an option that will be used often, you can add the Delayed Update after
Edit icon to the Edit Feature toolbar.
• If Delayed Update after Edit is off, the part is updated after the
completion of each edit operation. This is the default setting.
• If Delayed Update after Edit is on, feature updates are delayed while
edits are made. For example, the positioning dimension of a feature may
be changed followed by an edit to the parameters of another feature 15
without updating the model.
This option may not be used to delay a Delete, Suppress, or Unsuppress

feature operation.
Update Model
Once Delayed Update after Edit is enabled and edits are made, the Update
Model option becomes available so that you can update the model when it is
convenient.
This option is accessed by choosing Tools→Update→Update Model. If this
is an option that will be used often you can add the Update icon to the Edit
Feature toolbar.
The model will be updated automatically when the part is saved.

Editing the Model
Move Feature
The Move Feature option (Edit→Feature→Move) allows you to move a feature
that is not associatively positioned to a new location.
• This option excludes all swept features, relative datum features, and
instance arrays as well as features whose location has been constrained
using positioning dimensions.
• Features whose position is determined by associative positioning

dimensions must be moved by editing the positioning dimensions.
• Move Feature can be used to move a primitive that is used as the base
feature for the model.
15
DXC, DYC, DZC Moves the feature by specifying a rectangular

coordinates, based upon the Work Coordinate
System. (Delta XC, Delta YC, and Delta ZC)
To a Point Moves the feature from a reference point to a
destination point. The Point Constructor will
become available during the operation to assist
in the move.
Rotate Between Two Rotate the feature from a reference axis
Axes orientation to a destination axis orientation about
a specified pivot point.
CSYS to CSYS Repositions the feature from a Reference
Coordinate System to a Destination Coordinate
System. The coordinate systems are defined by
using the CSYS Constructor.

Editing the Model
Reattaching a Feature
One of the options available for editing under Edit Parameters is Reattach.
Reattach allows the feature references of the feature to be redefined.
A feature reference may be an attachment face, a thru face, a target edge for
positioning, etc. Objects that may have their references redefined include
most form features (holes, pockets, grooves, pads, slots, and bosses), and
linear instance sets of these features, trim faces of extruded and revolved
features, and user-defined features (UDFs).
In the example below, a pad feature and associated holes are reattached from
the original placement face to a new face.
15

Editing the Model
Using the Reattach Dialog

The Reattach dialog only enables the options that pertain to the selected
feature. For example, a feature must include a thru face for the Specify
Thru Face option to be enabled and must include one or more positioning
dimensions for the Redefine Positioning Dimensions option to be enabled.
When an option is chosen, the existing references of the type in question are
highlighted. For example, if a thru slot is selected and the Specify First Thru
Face icon is chosen, the current thru face for the slot is highlighted.
1 — Current positioning dimensions
2 — Reference direction type
3 — Change reference direction
4 — Change the normal direction
5 — Specify location of feature
15

Editing the Model
Reattach Options
The following options are available to redefine feature references:
Specify Target Placement Face — allows a new attachment face for

the feature being edited to be specified.
Specify Reference Direction — allows a new horizontal reference to

be specified for the feature being edited.
Redefine Positioning Dimensions — allows new positioning

dimensions to be specified for the feature being edited.
Specify First Thru Face — allows the first through/trim face of the
feature being edited to be redefined.
15
Specify Second Thru face — allows the second through/trim face of
the feature being edited to be redefined.
Specify Tool Placement Face — allows the tool face of a User Defined
Feature (UDF) to be redefined.
In addition, while using any of these redefine feature references options, the
following options on the Reattach dialog are available:
Filter — allows filtering of selectable object types including faces, datum
planes, edges, and datum axes. The default is All Types. The list of filter
options available is dependent on the specific Reattach option icon chosen.
Positioning Dimensions — A list window displays the types of positioning
dimensions currently on the selected feature. If MB1 is used to select a
dimension in this list, its available references are highlighted in the graphics
window. Double-clicking with MB1 on a dimension in the list allows it to
be redefined.
Direction Reference — allows the definition of a new Horizontal or Vertical
feature reference. The default is always set for the existing reference type.
Reverse Direction — allows the feature’s reference direction to be reversed.
Reverse Side — allows the feature’s normal direction to be reversed when
reattaching that feature to a datum plane.

Editing the Model
Specify Origin — allows quick relocation of the reattached feature by moving

it to a specified origin. This option is useful when reattaching features to
datum planes. Since features are initially placed at the center of a plane, the
update may fail since the plane’s center may not be near the feature’s actual
position. This option may be used with all features.
Delete Positioning Dimension — allows deletion of a selected positioning
dimension. If a feature does not have any positioning dimensions, this option
is grayed out.
15

Editing the Model
Activity — Reattaching and Moving Features
In this activity, you will reattach a feature to a new placement face. You will
also move fixed datum features to change the orientation of an associated
body.
15
Step 1: Open the edit_reattach_1 part.
Step 3: Reattach the pad feature.

In the graphics window, place the cursor over the pad (Status
line should read Rectangular Pad(6)) and choose MB3→Edit
Parameters.
Choose Reattach in the Edit Parameters dialog.

The Reattach dialog displays icons for the selection steps and
other options for reattaching the feature. The icon for Specify
Target Placement Face is active.
The current placement face for the Rectangular Pad feature is
highlighted in the graphics window and the Cue line prompts
you to select a new target face.

Editing the Model
Select the right face of the solid (1).

The second icon, Specify Reference Direction, is active. The
current horizontal reference is highlighted in the graphics
window and the Cue line prompts you to select a new
Horizontal Reference.
Select the lower edge of the face (2) as the horizontal reference.
15
The third icon, Redefine Positioning Dimensions, is active and
the Cue line prompts you to select a Dimension to Redefine.
Select the vertical positioning dimension from the graphics

window (20.0).
Select the lower front edge (1) of the solid as the target object.
Select the bottom outside edge of the pad (2) feature as the
tool edge.
Select the horizontal positioning dimension from the graphics

window (30.0).

Editing the Model
Select the right vertical edge (1) of the solid as the Target
Object.
Select the right outside edge (2) of the pad feature as the tool
edge.
Choose MB2 twice to complete the reattachment of the feature.

15
The holes also move with the pad because they are child
features of the pad. They were placed on a face of the pad and
were positioned relative to the edges of the pad.
The model was created by extruding a sketch. The XC-YC
Plane option was chosen when the sketch was created so
it is attached to a fixed datum plane and constrained to
fixed datum axes.
Now, you have been informed that the sketch should be in
the YC-ZC plane so that part orientation is consistent with
a standard product orientation used at your company. This
can be accomplished by moving the fixed datum features.
The sketch and all of the other dependent features will
move with them.

Editing the Model
Step 4: Move the fixed datum features.

Choose Edit→Feature→Move.
Select the three fixed datum features in the Move Feature

15 dialog. (Click and drag MB1 over all three features or
Ctrl-Select each feature.)
Choose OK. (MB2)
Choose Rotate Between Two Axes.
Choose Reset and OK to define the pivot point at 0,0,0.
Choose XC Axis as the reference axis.

Editing the Model
Choose ZC Axis as the reference axis.

The datum features and dependent features are rotated.
15

Editing the Model
Summary
The editing options provide robust capabilities to change design, form, fit, and
function. Because parametric values can be accessed and edited, investment
of parametric design time is not wasted when the need for design changes
occur.
In this lesson you:
• Edited features to satisfy design intent.
• Deleted features.
• Used the Edit During Update dialog to resolve an update failure.
• Reordered features using the Part Navigator.
• Reattached a feature to a different placement face.
• Moved datum features

15

Lesson
16 Instance Arrays
Purpose
This lesson is an introduction to Instance Arrays.
Objectives

• Create a Rectangular Array.
• Create a Circular Array.
16

Instance Arrays
Instance Feature
You can use the Instance Feature option to duplicate existing features and
eliminate repetitive tasks when creating models. This option can be accessed
by choosing the Instance Feature icon from the Feature Operation toolbar or
by choosing Insert→Associative Copy→Instance from the menu bar.
An Instance is a shape linked feature, similar to a copy. The Instance not only
duplicates the feature but preserves the parameters of the feature.
Since all instances of a feature are associated, the parameters of the original
feature may be edited and the changes are reflected in every instance of the
feature. The instance itself is also a parametric feature so parameters such
as the number of instances and spacing may be edited.
The following Instance Types are available:
• Rectangular Array
• Circular Array
• Mirror Body (Not covered in this lesson)
• Mirror Feature (Not covered in this lesson)
16 • Pattern Face (Not covered in this lesson)
There are three Methods available for creating Rectangular and Circular
Instance arrays:
• General
• Simple
• Identical
In most cases, the General method is sufficient. However, system performance

may be affected in complex models. Using the Simple method may increase
performance and, in a worst case scenario, the Identical method may be
required.
Most Feature operations (such as Edge Blend, Chamfer, Shell, etc.)
may not be instanced.

Instance Arrays
Rectangular Instance Array
This option is used to create a linear array of instances from selected

feature(s).
All rectangular arrays will be created in a plane parallel to the XC-YC plane.
The position of the rectangular array will remain relative to the location of
the feature that the array is based on. If the position of the original feature
changes, the position of the array will also change.
After selecting the feature(s) to be instanced, the following parameters must
be specified:
• Number Along XC — The total number of instances in the XC
direction, including the original feature.
• XC Offset — The spacing between adjacent instances in the XC

direction.
• Number Along YC — The total number of instances in the YC

direction, including the original feature.
• YC Offset — The spacing between adjacent instances in the YC

direction.
The offset values can be either positive or negative.

The number of instances for both the XC and YC directions must be a whole 16
number greater than zero.
1 — Hole selected for instance.
Number Along XC = 3
XC Offset = .75
Number Along YC = 4
YC Offset = 1

Instance Arrays
Circular Instance Array
This option is used to create a circular array of instances from selected

feature(s).
After selecting the feature(s) to be instanced, the following parameters must
be specified:
• Number — The total number of instances in the circular array,
including the existing feature.
• Angle — The angle between adjacent instances, measured about a

reference point.
Once the feature and parameters are specified, a rotation axis must be
defined. The circular instance array will be created in a plane normal to this
rotation axis. There are two ways to define a rotation axis:
• Datum Axis — An existing datum axis is selected. Associativity to the
datum axis is maintained. If the datum axis is later moved, the instance
array will move with it.
• Point & Direction — The Vector Constructor dialog is used to specify a

direction and the Point Constructor dialog is used to specify a reference
point. The selected features will be rotated about the reference point in a
plane normal to the vector direction.
16 1 — Hole selected for instance.
2 — Reference Point (Arc Center)
3 — Vector Direction (+ZC)
Number = 8
Angle = 45
When using the Point & Direction option, positional associativity

is not maintained. If geometry is used to define the reference
point and vector direction and the geometry is later moved, the
circular array will not move with it.

Instance Arrays
Activity — Rectangular Instance Array
In this activity, you will create a rectangular instance array of a hole feature.
There will be a total of six holes in the instance array. Two holes in
the XC direction and three holes in the YC direction.
Step 1: Open the instance_array_1 part.
Step 3: Orient the WCS so that the XC-YC plane is parallel to the plane of
the array.
Choose Format→WCS→Orient.
16
Choose X-Axis, Y-Axis.
Select the X–Axis (1) and Y–Axis (2) as shown.

Instance Arrays
The proper WCS orientation is shown below.
Choose OK.
Step 4: Create a rectangular array of the hole feature.
Choose the Instance Feature icon.

(Insert→Associative Copy→Instance)
16 Choose Rectangular Array.
Select Simple Hole(15). The feature may be selected from the

graphics window or from the Instance dialog.
Choose OK.
Method = General
Number Along XC = 2
XC Offset = 1.25
Number Along YC = 3
YC Offset = .687
Choose OK.
A preview of the instance array appears in the graphics
window. Choosing Yes will create the instance as it is shown.
Choosing No will return to the Enter Parameters dialog.

Instance Arrays
Choose Yes.
16

Instance Arrays
Activity — Circular Instance Array
In this activity, you will create a circular instance array of multiple features.
The finished part will have four legs that are identical and are to
be equally spaced about center of the cylinder. The figure below
illustrates the “Before and After” model.
16 Step 3: Create the Instance Feature.
Choose the Instance Feature icon.

(Insert→Associative Copy→Instance)
Choose Circular Array.
Select the following five features from the Instance dialog:
Extrude(5)
Boss(6)
Boss(7)
Extrude(9)
Simple Hole(12)
Multiple features may be selected by pressing MB1,

dragging over their names in the Instance dialog, and
releasing MB1.
Choose OK to confirm the selections.

Instance Arrays
Method = General
Number = 3
Angle = 120
Choose OK.
The axis of rotation must be selected. Using a Datum Axis
maintains positional associativity.
Choose Datum Axis.
Select the Datum Axis (1).
16
A preview of the instance array appears in the graphics

window. For better performance, only the first feature selected
is previewed.
Choose Yes if the temporary display looks correct.
Step 4: Add a chamfer to an instanced hole feature.
Choose the Chamfer icon.

(Insert→Detail Feature→Chamfer)
Input Option = Symmetric Offsets

Offset = 1.5
Chamfer All Instances = ON

Instance Arrays
Select the circular edge of any one of the instanced holes.

Confirm the selection if necessary and choose OK.
Step 5: Edit the Instance array parameters.

Place the cursor over any of the instanced features and choose
MB3→Edit Parameters.
All options available for editing the selected feature are
16 displayed. The options may vary depending on which feature
is selected.
Choose Instance Array Dialog.
Method = General
Number = 4
Angle = 90
The Radius value is inferred by the distance from the

arc center of the feature to the Datum Axis that was
selected as the Rotation Axis for the Circular Array.

Instance Arrays
Choose OK three times to complete the edit (or MB2).

The part should now have four legs.
16

Instance Arrays
Activity (Optional) — Associativity of the Rotation Axis
In this activity, you will compare the positional associativity when the Point
Direction and Datum Axis options are used to define the rotation axis of a
circular instance array.
Step 3: Investigate the model.
16 Choose the push pin icon in the upper right corner to

Choose the Layer Settings icon (Format→Layer Settings)

and make the display of ALL layers Selectable.

Instance Arrays
The model contains two identical hole patterns. The center hole
in each pattern is positioned associatively to the relative datum
planes in the part. The hole pattern on the left was created by
specifying a point in space and a vector as the rotation axis. The
pattern on the right was created by selecting a datum axis as the
rotation axis.
Step 4: Edit the model.

In the Part Navigator, double-click the Block(0) feature.
X Length = 5 16
Y Length = 10
Z Length = 1
Choose OK twice to update the model. (or MB2)

Instance Arrays
The model updates to reflect the change. Notice that the hole
pattern on the left does not move with the datum planes and
center hole but maintains the same position in absolute space.
This is because the hole pattern was created with a non-associative
reference point and direction vector.
The hole pattern on the right is associative to the datum axis that
was used to define the rotation axis and updated accordingly.
16

Instance Arrays
Summary
The Instance functionality duplicates existing features, eliminating repetitive
efforts in the creation of models.
In this lesson you:
• Created a Rectangular Instance Array.
• Created a Circular Instance Array.
16

16
Lesson
17 The Master Model
Purpose
This lesson introduces the Master Model concept.
Objectives

• Review an existing Master Model.
• Edit a Master Model and update an associated non-master part.
• Create a new Master Model.
17

The Master Model
The Assembly Modeler

An assembly is a part containing stored links to other part that are pieces
of the assembly. The geometry that defines the piece parts of the assembly
resides in the original part only, there is no duplication in the assembly part.
A link in the assembly part is referred to as a component object. A component
object stores information about the piece part such as its location, attributes,
origin, orientation, permissions, degree of display, and its relationship to
other parts.
The Master Model Concept

The Master Model Concept may be applied by simply creating an assembly
consisting of one component part. It is valuable as a means of promoting
concurrent engineering. The person responsible for the design of a part
may not be the same person responsible for the downstream applications
performed on the part such as drafting, manufacturing, analysis, etc.
The Master Model Concept is also valuable in protecting the design intent of
the part from inadvertent corruption by a downstream user. The downstream
user will have write privileges to the assembly part, but only read privileges
to the model. The solid model is referenced for the application work, but the
downstream user will not have the ability to change it.
Because the application information in the assembly or non-master part is
referencing the original master model part, edits to the master model will
be updated in the non-master part.
Implementing the Master Model concept allows diverse yet dependent design
processes to access the same master geometry during development. The
entire part creation process becomes more efficient, allowing many disciplines
to work at the same time and allowing master model edits to be automatically
17 updated in non-master parts.

The Master Model
The power of implementing a Master Model is that the independent design

processes are dependent on the same master geometry during development.
Drafting Assembly
Master Model
Analysis N/C
Each application uses a separate assembly part. When the Master Model is
revised, the other applications will automatically update with minimal or
no associativity loss.
The design intent of the various design applications can be maintained
through protection of the Master Model. 17

The Master Model
Master Model Example
Manufacturing engineers have the need to design fixture devices, define

machining operations, and designate cutter tools and save this data in their
models.
By creating a manufacturing "assembly" and adding a component to it, they
can then generate their application specific geometry or data in a separate
part which references the master geometry:
• This avoids duplication of model geometry
• Different users can work in separate parts simultaneously
abcd1234_mfg.prt
Non-master part owned by
manufacturing engineer. Contains
manufacturing data and a component
object which references the master model
part.
abcd1234.prt
Owned by designer. Contains
master model geometry.
17
The manufacturing engineer owns the assembly part but does not necessarily
have write access to the master model which is owned by the designer.

The Master Model
Activity — Exploring a Master Model Assembly

In this activity, you will identify the advantages of using a master model.
Step 1: Open the mm_tapedisp_dwg part.
Choose Options.
Verify the Load Method is set to From Directory in the Load

Options dialog and choose OK.
Choose the mm_tapedisp_dwg part and OK.
Step 2: Start the Drafting application. (Start→Drafting)
Step 3: Inspect the drawing for dimensional values.

Zoom in on section view A-A and note the slot width of .88 (1)
and the corner radius of .13 (2). Both dimensions have been
rounded from the model dimensions to two decimal places.
17
Fit the view and note the drawing name, SH1, at the lower
left corner. (MB3→Fit)
Step 4: Investigate the model.

Start the Modeling application. (Start→Modeling)

The Master Model
Choose Information→Feature and note that there are no

features.
Choose Tools→Expression and note that there are no

expressions.
Cancel the Expressions dialog.
Choose Assemblies→Reports→List Components.

The Information window appears showing the assembly
structure for mm_tapedisp_dwg and indicates that there is
one component named mm_tapedisp. This part contains the
Master Model definition.
Component Report
Components of C:\parts\mm_tapedisp_dwg.prt
Part Name Ref Set Name Component Name

mm_tapedisp SOLID MM_TAPE_DISP
Step 5: Examine the display.

Choose Information→Object.
Place the cursor over the solid body. When the cursor changes
to a QuickPick indicator, choose MB1.
The QuickPick window lists each selectable object and the part
in which it resides.
17 Choose Solid Body in MM_TAPE_DISP in the QuickPick list.
Choose OK. (MB2)

The Information window appears with information regarding
the solid, its owning part, and confirmation that it is a
component.
Information on object # 1
Owning part C:\parts\mm_tapedisp_dwg.prt

Comp member in part C:\parts\mm_tapedisp.prt
Layer 1, inherited from component
Step 6: Open the Master Model part.

The Master Model
Choose the mm_tapedisp part and OK.
Step 7: Edit the expression for Roll_width.

Changed the Listed Expressions option to Named.
Select the Roll_width expression.
Change the .875 Formula to .75 and choose OK.
17
The opening for the tape roll changes in width to accommodate

the modified dimension.
Step 8: Edit the blend on the inside of the spool cavity.
Activate the Part Navigator from the resource bar.
Double-click the Blend(21) feature.

The Master Model
Key in a new value of .06 for the radius (Set1 R).
Choose OK. (or MB2 twice)
Step 9: Change the Displayed Part to mm_tapedisp_dwg.

Choose Window→mm_tapedisp_dwg to change the Displayed
Part.
Start the Drafting application. (Start→Drafting)

Notice the drawing name now shows (OUT-OF-DATE) to
remind you the views are not updated.
Step 10: Update the drawing.
Choose the Update Views icon in the Drawing Layout

toolbar. (Edit→View→Update Views)
Choose All in the Update Views dialog and choose OK.
Step 11: Zoom in on section A-A again to see the changes to the master
model reflected on the drawing
17
Step 12: Close all parts. (File→Close→All Parts)

The Master Model
Activity — Creating a Non-Master Part
In this activity, you will create a new non-master part which references an
existing master model.
Step 1: Open the mm_master_1 part.
Step 3: Verify the Assemblies application is turned on.

(Choose Start→Assemblies if it is not already on).
Step 4: Create the non-master part.
Choose the Create New Parent icon.

(Assemblies→Components→Create New Parent)
Key in ***_master_1_dwg where *** represents your initials.
Choose OK.
17
Step 5: Open the Assembly Navigator and verify the assembly structure.
Step 6: Close all parts. (File→Close→All Parts)

The Master Model
Summary
This Master Model approach offers many benefits. Master model parts may
be write-protected and owned by one user or group yet the data can be shared
with other users or groups. Downstream users can access the latest data and
incorporate updates as the part is being developed.
17

Lesson
18 Introduction to Drafting
Purpose
This lesson will introduce the Drafting application.
Objectives

• Open, Create, and Delete drawings.
• Add, Edit, and Remove Views on Drawings.
• Modify Preferences.
• Create Utility Symbols.
• Create Dimensions.
• Create Annotations.
18

Introduction to Drafting
Working with Drawings

You can use the Drafting application to quickly create drawings of 3D parts.
Drawings are populated with views that do not need to be defined before
the views are placed on the drawing.
Some of the benefits of the Drafting application are:
• You can add views to the drawing just by indicating their location with
the cursor.
• When you add orthographic views, they will automatically be aligned with
the parent view as you create them.
• Every view is fully associated with the solid. If the solid is updated, the
views will also be updated.
• Drafting annotation is placed directly on the drawing.
• Drafting annotation (dimensions, labels, and symbols with leaders) is

fully associative to the geometry you select, and will update automatically
if there are changes in the solid model.
• Fully associative view boundaries are automatically calculated when the

drawing is updated.
• Section views are fully associative to the solid model.
18

Creating New Drawing Sheets
Upon entering the Drafting application, you will either see an existing
drawing, or—if there are no drawing sheets in the part yet—you will be given
the Insert Sheet dialog so that you can specify the parameters for a new
drawing sheet.
To create a new drawing sheet, define the drawing parameters: drawing sheet
name, size, scale, units of measure and projection angle. Once the desired
parameters have been set, choosing OK replaces the current display with a
view of the new drawing of the specified size.
There are a few different ways to create a new drawing sheet in a part that
already contains drawing sheets.
• Choose the New Sheet icon in the Drawing Layout toolbar.
• Choose Insert→Sheet from the menu bar.
• Use MB3 over the drawing node in the Part Navigator and choose
Insert Sheet from the pop-up menu.
18

Opening a Drawing
There are a few ways to open a drawing:

• In the Part Navigator, double click the sheet name or, use MB3 over the
drawing sheet node and choose Open from the pop-up menu.
• Choose the Open Sheet icon and select the sheet name from a list.
• Choose Format→Open Sheet and select the sheet name from a list.
To open a drawing, select from a list of previously created drawings. You

can either select the desired drawing name from the list or enter a specific
drawing name in the Drawing Sheet Name text field.
If there are multiple drawings in the part, you can filter the list to include a
specific series of drawings.
18

Editing a Drawing
In NX, the term "drawing" is used to define a collection of views. Think of
each drawing as a separate page in the part. One part can contain many
pages, in other words, many drawings.
To edit a drawing, you can:
• Choose the Sheet icon in the Drafting Edit toolbar.
• Choose Edit→Sheet.
• Use MB3 in the Part Navigator to highlight the drawing sheet and choose
Edit Sheet from the pop-up menu.
• Select the dashed-line border of a drawing sheet with MB3 to access the
pop-up menu and choose Edit Sheet.
18

The current state of the displayed drawing affects the options that are
available. You should be aware of the following:
• The projection angle can only be changed if no projected views exist on
the current drawing being modified.
• You can edit the drawing to a larger or smaller size. You can even edit the
drawing to a size small enough so that a portion of a view falls outside
the boundary of the drawing. However, if you edit the drawing to a size
so small that a member view falls entirely outside the boundary of the
drawing, you will get an error message.
• If you need to edit the drawing to a smaller size, but cannot due to the
current position of the views, you will first have to move the views closer
to the drawing’s origin at the lower left corner of the drawing.
18

Deleting a Drawing
There are a few different ways to delete a drawing sheet:

• Choose Edit→Delete Sheet.
A Delete Sheet dialog lists of drawings eligible for deletion. The name of
the current drawing sheet will not be in the list and cannot be deleted
using the dialog.
• Select the dashed-line border of the drawing sheet with MB3 then choose
Delete from the pop-up menu. This will delete the current drawing sheet.
• In the Part Navigator, select the drawing node with MB3 and choose
Delete.
• Choose the Delete Sheet icon from the Drawing Layout toolbar.
18

Activity — Creating New Drawing Sheets

In this activity, you will create new drawing sheets in an existing part that
has no drawing sheets.
Step 1: Open the drafting_arm_1_dwg part.
This is a non-master part. The master model part (drafting_arm_1)
was added as a component.
Step 2: Start the Drafting application and create a new drawing sheet.
Start the Drafting application. (Start→Drafting)
Because there are no existing drawing sheets in this part, the
Insert Sheet dialog appears.
18

Verify the following settings in the Insert Sheet dialog.

• Default drawing name is set to SH1.
• Inches option is on.
• Default drawing size is set to E - 34 X 44.
• Scale is set to 1:1 (1 over 1).
• Projection is set to 3rd Angle Projection.
18

Choose OK.
In the graphics window, the dashed lines define the border of
the new E size drawing sheet. The name of the drawing sheet
appears in the lower left hand corner.
Step 3: Add another drawing sheet.
Choose the New Sheet icon from the Drawing Layout

toolbar. (Insert→Sheet)
Verify that the default drawing name is set to SH2.
18

Choose OK to accept the defaults.

The name in the lower left corner of the graphics window
shows that you have created a second drawing sheet. The Part
Navigator will also list the existing drawing sheets in the part.
18

Activity — Opening and Editing Drawing Sheets
In this activity, you will open and edit existing drawing sheets.
Step 1: Open the drafting_edit_1_dwg part.
This is a non-master part. The master model part (drafting_edit_1)
The drawing sheet 93A12345–3 is displayed.
Step 3: Change the current drawing size.

In the graphics window, place the cursor over the dashed
border of the drawing sheet and choose MB3→Edit Sheet.
Choose the standard drawing size of A1 - 594 x 841.

18 Choose Apply.
The drawing changes to display the new size.
Step 4: Change the current drawing scale.

The drawing scale establishes the default scale of all drawing
views on the sheet. It is represented in a fractional format with
two text fields arranged as a numerator and denominator.
The drawing is currently displaying the views at 1/2 full size (1 in
the top scale field and 2 in the bottom scale field).

In this case you want every view on this drawing sheet to display
the part full size.
Leave the upper Scale field set to 1. Change the lower Scale
field to 1, then choose OK.
All the views that are present on the drawing assume the new
scale. The positions of the drawing views do not change with
the scale.
Step 5: Open the SH1 drawing sheet.
Open the Part Navigator .
Double-click the Sheet “SH1” node in the Part Navigator

(MB3→Open).
Drawing sheet SH1 is displayed in the graphics window.
18
Step 6: Rename the current drawing.

In the Part Navigator, place the cursor over the drawing sheet
Sheet “SH1” and choose MB3→Rename.

Key in Trimetric and press Enter.

You can also rename the current drawing sheet by
placing the cursor over the drawing border, choosing
MB3→Properties, and keying in a new name.
18

Drawing Monochrome Display
Monochrome displays a drawing in a single color. You may specify the line
and background colors.
You can use the Monochrome Display option by:
• Choosing Preferences→Visualization and then choose the Color Settings
tab.
Then turn the Monochrome Display option on in the Drawing Part

Settings section.
The four color selections become active.
The default colors for the foreground and background are black and gray
but any color may be selected.
The Show Widths option displays line widths.
18

• In the Part Navigator, place the cursor over the drawing sheet node and
use MB3 to select Monochrome from the pop-up menu.
The Monochrome Display will take on the color selections already

defined through the Visualization Preferences dialog.
18

View Preferences
The display of views is controlled by choosing the View Preferences icon or
Preferences→View.
You can then use the View Preferences dialog to define the display of hidden
lines, silhouettes, smooth edges, as well as section view background lines, etc.
The Centerlines option automatically creates linear, cylindrical, and

bolt circle centerlines for views where the axis of the cylindrical face is
perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing sheet.
18

Hidden Lines
If you turn the Hidden Line option off, Hidden Line is not performed and all
hidden lines in the view will appear as solid lines.
If you turn the Hidden Line option on, the color, font, and width of the hidden
lines are determined by the settings in the Color/Font/Width menus.
The color option is not applicable in Monochrome mode.

Widths are displayed only if Show Widths is turned on in the
Preferences→Visualization dialog.
Edges Hidden By Edges

18 The Edges Hidden By Edges option controls the display of edges which are
hidden by other overlapping edges. If this option is turned off, edges hidden
by other edges are erased from the view.

Smooth Edges
Smooth edges are those whose adjacent faces have the same surface tangent
at the edge where they meet.
If you turn the Smooth Edges option on, you can use the Color/Font/Width
settings to specify their appearance. You can also use the End Gaps option to
vary the edge intersection appearance.
18

Virtual Intersections
The Virtual Intersections option allows you to display imaginary intersection

curves as required by the JIS standard (section 6.13) and the ISO 128-1982
standard (section 5.2.2). The Virtual Intersections option is used when you
want to display the curves in a member view that show where blended faces
theoretically intersect. The color, font, and width of virtual intersections can
be controlled when the Virtual Intersections option is turned on.
The virtual intersection curves only display if the original surfaces

joined or intersected before they were blended.
18

Adding a Base View

The first view to add to a drawing is the Base View. Other views will be
projected from the base view. A drawing can have more than one base view.
There are several ways to add a base view.
• In the graphics window, place the cursor over the dashed line that
represents the drawing border and choose Add Base View from the MB3
pop-up menu.
Add Base View is the default option (bold) in the pop-up menu.
So, the base view can be added simply by double-clicking on the
drawing border.
• In the Part Navigator, select a drawing sheet node and choose Add Base
View from the MB3 pop-up menu.
• Choose the Add Base View icon in the Drawing Layout toolbar.
• Choose Insert→View→Base View.
When using any of these methods, click in the graphics window to place the
base view on the drawing.
18

View Creation Options Bar

After choosing Add Base View option, the View Creations Option Bar appears
in the upper left corner of the graphics window.
1 Style — Provides the same set of parameters as the View Preferences

option. However, when these options are set from this toolbar they are
specific to the view that is being placed on the drawing.
2 View — Determines the orientation of the base view. A pull-down menu
list the canned views and any custom views that have been created.
3 Scale — Provides a means to set the scale of the base view. A pull-down
menu list several preset scales as well as the options to enter a custom
scale or define the scale by an expression.
4 Orient View Tool — Provides a means to orient a view to a orientation
that is not listed in the View pull-down menu.
5 Move View — This option only appears on the toolbar if there is
already a view on the drawing. This option allows you to move existing
views during the operation of adding a new view.
18

Orient View Tool
When the Orient View Tool is selected a preview screen is presented along
with several options to orient the model as desired.
1 – Rotation Tool 4 – Associative Orientation

2 – View Plane Tool 5 – Reset
3 – Horizontal Direction 6 – Reverse Direction
18

Adding Projected Views

Immediately after placing a base view on the drawing, you may create a
projected view from the base view by moving the cursor off the base view.
A projected view may also be created from a view that has been previously
placed on the drawing. This is accomplished by placing the cursor over a
view’s border, when it highlights click MB3, from the pop-up menu choose
Add Projected View.
Projection Lines
Once the cursor is moved off the base view the system displays projection
lines. The view may be projected at any angle from the base view however,
the system will snap at 45° increments.
Preview
As you move the cursor around on the drawing the new view may be
previewed as a view border, wireframe, Hidden Wireframe, or shaded image.
To select a preview option click MB3 and choose Preview Style.
1 — Projection lines
2 — Border preview of new projected view.
18

View Creation Options Bar
During the creation of a projected view the View Creation Options Bar is
displayed in the upper left corner of the graphics screen with several different
options. Displayed below the bar is the Offset dynamic input box.
1 Style — Provides the same set of parameters as the View Preferences

option. If this option is not used the new view will inherit the style of
its parent view.
2 Base View — Allow you to choose a different base view then originally
selected.
3 Hinge Line — Used to define and associative projection. The projected
view is 90° to the defined hinge line.
4 Vector Constructor — Pull-down becomes active if Hinge Line has
been selected.
5 Reverse Direction — Changes the projection direction from the hinge
line.
6 Move View — Allows you to move existing views during the operation
of adding a new view.
7 Offset — Value is used to space the projected view from
the parent view. The value is applied from the center of
the views. The input box is made active by choosing
MB3→Cursor Tracking while adding a projected view. 18
To apply a value: Key in the value and press Enter.
To Reset: Press Backspace and then Enter.

Editing Existing Views
Editing Style
The style of an existing view may be changed by:

• Double-clicking on the view border or choosing MB3→Style on the view
border.
• Double-clicking or choosing MB3→Style on the drawing view node in

the Part Navigator.
• Choose Edit→Style.
Moving Views
A view may be dragged around the drawing by placing the cursor over the
border of the view, when the cursor changes to drag mode, hold MB1
down and move the view as required. As you move the view in proximity to
another view, alignment lines will appear to aid in the positioning of the
view. The alignment lines will appear relative to the top, bottom, left, right,
or center of the view.
If you select more than one view, they can all be moved simultaneously.
18

Removing Views From a Drawing

To remove views from a drawing, you can:
• Select the view border with MB3; choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
• Use MB3 in the Part Navigator to highlight the view to be removed, and
select Delete from the pop-up menu.
• Choose the Delete icon and select the view.
• Choose Edit→Delete and select the view.
Once a view is removed from a drawing, all drafting objects or view

modifications associated to that view are deleted.
18

Activity — Adding Views to a Drawing

In this activity, you will adding a base view and projected views to a drawing.
Step 1: Open the drafting_bearing_mount_dwg part.
This is a non-master part. The master model part
(drafting_bearing_mount) was added as a component.
Step 2: Start the Drafting application.
Step 3: Add a Base View.

Place the cursor over the edge of the drawing border and
double-click.
The View Creations Option Bar appears and the top view is
selected by default. You will use this view for the base view.
Click MB3 and choose Preview Style→Wireframe.
Choose the Style icon in the View Creations Option Bar.
Choose the General tab.
Verify that Centerlines is checked and key in a scale of .5.
18
Choose the Hidden Lines tab.

Verify that Hidden Line is checked and the font is set to

Invisible.
Choose OK.
Locate the view in the upper left corner of the drawing by

clicking MB1.
18

Step 4: Project a Front view.

Move the cursor straight below the base view so that the
alignment line is vertical.
Locate the view in the bottom left corner of the drawing by

clicking MB1.
Press MB2 to exit the Add Projected View function.
Step 5: Project a Right view off the Front view.

Place the cursor over the Front view’s border; it becomes
highlighted.
Click MB3 and choose Add Projected View.
Move the cursor to the right of the Front view so that the
alignment line is horizontal.
18

Locate the view in the bottom right corner of the drawing by

clicking MB1.
Press MB2.
Step 6: Project an auxiliary view.

Place the cursor over the Right view’s border.
Click MB3 and choose Add Projected View.
Move the cursor around the Right view from the 12:00 to the
9:00 position.
Notice that at approximately the 10:00 position, a face in the
Top and Front views highlight as well as the corresponding
edge in the Right view. If you select a location with these faces
highlighted you will create a true auxiliary view of that face.
18

Select a location as shown below.
Press MB2 to exit.
In some cases, you may have to explicitly define a hinge

line for an auxiliary view. You can do this by choosing the
Hinge Line option from the View Creation Options Bar
and selecting an edge of the part.
18

Utility Symbols
The Utility Symbols option creates various centerlines, offset center points,
target points, and intersection symbols.
When you choose the Utility Symbol icon (or Insert→Symbol→Utility
Symbol), the Utility Symbols dialog displays. This dialog allows you to
specify settings that control the utility symbol as you create it. You can also
use this dialog to modify existing symbols.
The Utility Symbols dialog consists

of four areas:
1 — Symbol Icons
2 — Point Position Options
3 — Symbol Display Parameters
4 — Preference Options
18

Point Position Options
You can determine a symbol’s placement by selecting an object (or objects)

from which to create the utility symbol. When you select an object, the system
evaluates the desired location relative to that object based upon the setting
of the position option.
1 — Control Point
2 — Intersection Point
3 — Arc Center
4 — Cylindrical Face
5 — Screen Position
You can select up to 100 points to define a linear centerline, circular

centerline or bolt circle.
The Cylindrical Face option allows you to place cylindrical or symmetrical

centerlines by choosing the desired cylindrical or conical face, even if it is
hidden inside the solid.
Multiple Centerlines
This option, when turned on, allows you to create multiple linear or
cylindrical centerline symbols without having to choose Apply after each
object is selected.
You can only apply multiple cylindrical centerlines when the point position
option is set to Cylindrical Face. That’s because the system assumes the
18 cylindrical objects are all oriented in the same manner and are of the same
length.

Using the Inherit Option

You can set the symbol preferences by choosing the Inherit option. This
allows you to select an existing symbol from which to inherit preferences.
When the symbol is selected, the preferences matching those of the selected
symbol will be set in the dialog and will be used to create a new symbol.
Inherit can also be used to edit the display of an existing symbol. To do this,
you would select the symbol you intend to edit, choose Inherit, then select
the symbol whose preferences you wish to see reflected in the first. The new
settings will be displayed in the dialog. Choose Apply to perform the edit.
Using the Default Option

The Default option resets the preferences to the customer default settings.
You can use this option to set the preferences before creating a new symbol or
to edit an existing symbol.
To edit an existing symbol, select the symbol and choose Default. The default
settings will be displayed in the dialog. Choose Apply to update the symbol.
Associativity of Utility Symbols

A utility symbol’s placement is controlled by a position on an object. The
system will automatically size the symbol components to the objects selected
to create it, based upon the local preference settings.
Deleting Utility Symbols

You can delete a utility symbol by selecting the symbol from the graphics
window and choose the Delete icon. (Edit→Delete)
The symbols can be selected at any position. When you delete a utility
symbol, any associated objects such as dimensions are also deleted unless the
Retain Annotation option in Preferences→Drafting is turned on.
Adding Automatic Centerlines

Automatic center lines may be added to a view after its creation. The hole or 18
pin axis must be either perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing
view
To apply automatic center lines:
• Choose Insert→Symbol→Utility Symbol.
• Choose Automatic Centerline.
• Select the view and choose Apply.

Creating a Linear Centerline
A linear centerline is a straight line that passes through selected points or

arcs, with a perpendicular line through each position. A linear centerline that
passes through a single point or arc is called a simple centerline.
To create a linear centerline, select the Linear Centerline icon, set the point
position option if needed, select relative objects, and select Apply or OK.
The following associativity rules apply to linear centerlines:
• If the linear centerline contains two associated points, repositioning or
deleting one of those points results in an automatic resize and update of
the linear centerline.
• If the linear centerline contains three or more associated points and a

point is removed from the centerline, that point is disassociated from
the centerline.
• If the linear centerline contains three or more associated points and all
the associated points are moved, the centerline is automatically resized
and updated. If all of the points are deleted, the centerline is also deleted,
depending on the Retained Annotation status.
18

Activity — Creating a Linear Centerline
In this activity, you will create a linear centerline.

Step 1: Open the drafting_sym1_dwg part.
This is a non-master part. The master model part (drafting_sym1)
Step 3: Verify that the work layer is 101. (Format→Layer Settings)
Step 4: Create a simple centerline.
Choose the Utility Symbol icon.

(Insert→Symbol→Utility Symbol)
Choose the Linear Centerline icon.
18
Set the Point Position option to Arc Center.

Select the single hole at the right end of the bar.
If you select the wrong point for the symbol position,

choose the icon again to deselect the object and start
over.
Choose Apply to create the centerline (Ctrl-MB2).
Step 5: Create a linear centerline through multiple points.

A linear centerline is created if you select multiple collinear holes.
Verify Multiple Centerlines is turned off.
Select both of the outer circles of the counterbored holes.
The size of the symbol components is determined by the objects

selected. The linear centerline would display with a different size
if the inner circles had been selected.
18 Choose Apply (Ctrl-MB2).
Any holes selected that are not collinear will not be added to the
symbol.

If a point is selected that is not collinear, the following error

message will appear.
18

Manually Creating a Cylindrical Centerline
You can create a cylindrical centerline that conforms to ANSI Y14.2 standards
through points, arcs or cylindrical faces. The objects used to create cylindrical
centerlines are defined by the Position Option.
1 — Control Point
2 — Intersection Point
3 — Arc Center
4 — Cylindrical Face
5 — Screen Position
The Cylindrical Face position option allows you to choose a cylindrical or

conical face of a feature for placement.
Point position options allow you to create a centerline associated to objects
other than cylinders.
The following associativity rules apply to cylindrical centerlines:
• A cylindrical centerline must be associated to two point positions.
• A cylindrical centerline is updated when the data to which it is associated

is moved or resized.
• If one of the objects to which a cylindrical centerline is associated is

deleted, the centerline will also be deleted.
18

Activity — Creating a Cylindrical Centerline
In this activity, you will create cylindrical centerlines using both the Arc
Center and Cylindrical Face options.
Step 1: Open the drafting_sym4_dwg part.
This is a non-master part. The master model part (drafting_sym4)
Step 3: Change the work layer to 101. (Format→Layer Settings)
Step 4: Create a Cylindrical Centerline symbol.
Choose the Utility Symbol icon.

Select the Cylindrical Centerline icon.
Set the Point Position option to Arc Center.
18

Select two arc center locations for each of the three centerline
placements shown below:
1 — Select this pair of edges.

2 — Select this pair of edges.
3 — Select this pair of edges, confirming your selections if
needed.
18

The resulting cylindrical centerlines are shown.
When creating cylindrical centerlines, you may not always be

able to use the Arc Center point position option. The larger hole
depicted in the section view is partially hidden. Since you cannot
see the left edge of the hole in this view, you would not be able
to select it.
In the orthographic view, you will find it impossible to select the
right hand edge of a small hole without picking the center of the
larger outside edge of the part instead.
In this case, the Cylindrical Face option can be used to select a
cylindrical or conical face of a feature for placement of a centerline
symbol.
Step 5: Create a centerline symbol using the Cylindrical Face option. 18

Continue using the Cylindrical Centerline icon.

Change the Point Position option to Cylindrical Face.
Place your cursor over the cylindrical face as shown and select
the face using MB1.
Indicate end points 1 and 2 of the cylindrical centerline, using

cursor locations as shown. The indicated end points are
projected to the axis of the cylindrical face, and two drafting
points are created that are associated to the selected face.
When creating centerlines using the Cylindrical

Face option, the local display parameter values
18 that determine the symbol past part distances are
disregarded.

Dimensions
The various dimensions types may be accessed two different ways.
• Choose Insert→Dimension and then choose the desired dimension type.
18

• Use the Dimensions toolbar. This toolbar offers a menu of the available
dimension types.
18

Annotation Preferences
Dimensions may be displayed in many different ways. Some of the settings

are for appearance, i.e. extension line and arrowhead. Other settings convey
the value of the dimension, i.e. the number of decimal places used to define
tolerance. In general most of the dimensions will share the same appearance.
The Annotation Preferences dialog is used to capture those global settings.
The Annotation Preferences dialog is activated by choosing
Preferences→Annotation or by choosing the Annotations Preferences icon.
The following tabs apply to dimensions:

• Dimensions — Controls the display of extension lines and arrows,
orientation of text, precision and tolerance, chamfer dimensions, and
narrow dimensions.
• Line/Arrow — Controls the style and size of leaders, arrows, and extension
lines for both dimensions and other annotations. A preview area provides
a rendition of the symbol with leaders and dimensions.
• Lettering — Controls the alignment, justification, size, and font of text.
• Units — Controls the desired unit of measure for dimensions and whether
dimensions are created in single or dual dimension format.
• Radial — Controls the settings that are unique to diameter and radius
dimensions.
18

Dimension Preferences and Placement
Once a dimension type is selected, a Dimension icon option bar will appear
in the upper left corner of the graphics window.
This option bar accesses many of the same settings found in the Annotation
Preferences dialog that apply to dimensions. However, when changes are
made with this option bar, they only affect the dimensions being created in
the current operation and do not change the global preference settings. The
settings will return to the global condition when you exit dimension creation
or choose Reset (5).
1 – Style 4 – Annotation
2 – Precision (decimal places) 5 – Reset
3 – Tolerance Type
Annotation Placement Toolbar
The Annotation Placement toolbar also appears when creating dimensions to

help control the placement of the dimension.
1 – Leader Type
2 – Leader Placement
3 – Opens the Create Leader dialog
18 4 – Associate Origin with Helper Lines
5 – Alignment Position
6 – Opens the Origin Tool dialog
7 – Annotation Plane

The Snap Point Toolbar
The Snap Point toolbar will be available when creating dimensions.
This toolbar acts as a filter for selecting points on parts. You can turn icons on
(highlighted) or off in order to limit your selection to specific types of points.
The Two Pick Intersection icon (at the right end of the toolbar) will let you
select any two edges whose intersection you cannot get within the select ball.
(When you turn it on, all of the other icons will be grayed out.)
The Escape Key
You can press the Escape key at any time to release all selected objects. It is
often quicker than using Shift+Select.
Placement Cues for Dimensions
As you create dimensions it is now very simple to align the dimension with an
existing dimension. To help you do this, the system will provide graphical
cues whenever the origins of the dimensions line up.
As you begin to locate the dimension, pass the cursor over the existing
dimension that you want to align to. Whenever the placement image of
the new dimension is aligned horizontally or vertically with the existing
dimension (or other annotation), you will get a dashed help line.
18
If you want the new dimension associated with the existing dimension, make
sure the Associate Origin with Helper Lines icon is turned on (It is on
by default).

Appended Text
Text may be appended to a dimension while you are creating it.

If you want only one line of appended text, you can select the object(s) to
dimension and, prior to locating the dimension, choose one of the Appended
Text options in the MB3 pop-up menu.
You may also use the right (after), left (before), up (above), or down
(below) arrow key on the keyboard instead of the MB3 pop-up options.
If the text is more complex, you will need to use the Annotation Editor dialog.
You can access the Annotation Editor from the interactive toolbar at any
time, or you can access it after selection of objects (and before locating the
dimension) by using MB3.
To add appended text to a previously created dimension that does not already
have appended text, you can:
• Double-click on the dimension, and then use the Annotation Editor icon
in the interactive toolbar.
• Double-click on the dimension and then use the right (after), left (before),
18 up (above), or down (below) arrow key on the keyboard to get the appended
text location you desire. Key in the text and press Enter.
• Double-click on the dimension, and then use MB3 to choose either

Appended Text (for a single line of text), or Annotation Editor (for more
complex text).

To edit existing appended text, you can:

• Double-click on the appended text.
• Double-click on the dimension and then use the right (after), left (before),
up (above), or down (below) arrow key on the keyboard to get the appended
text location you desire.
• Select the dimension, and then use MB3 on the appended text. You get
the following menu:
the Edit Appended Text option will access the Annotation Editor dialog.
18

Tolerances
There are several ways to add or edit tolerances.

Prior to creating a dimension (after choosing a dimension icon), you can
choose the Tolerance icon on the interactive toolbar, and set the desired
tolerance type. The Tolerance Values icon is then added to the toolbar. Choose
it and enter the desired values.
While creating a dimension (after selecting the object to dimension), you can:
• Set the tolerance type by choosing either MB3→Tolerance Type or the
Tolerance Type icon.
• Set the desired tolerance values by choosing either MB3→Tolerance or

the Tolerance Values icon.
Tolerance Type
Tolerance Values
To add a tolerance later, you can select the dimension and use the methods
shown above.
To edit a tolerance later, you can use one of the following three methods:
• Select the tolerance with MB3→Edit.
• Double-click on the tolerance.
• Double-click on the dimension to access the dimension bar (in the upper
18 left corner of the graphics screen).

Text Orientation and Text Arrow Placement
To set the Text Arrow Placement or the Text Orientation while creating a
dimension, use MB3 before locating the text. You get the following menu:
Horizontal
Aligned
Text Over Dim. Line
Perpendicular
Text at Angle
Automatic
Arrows Out
Arrows In
To change Text Orientation or Text Arrow Placement of an existing

dimension, double–click on the dimension, and then use MB3. You will get
the same menu as shown above.
Moving a Dimension
To change the origin of an existing dimension, simply drag it with MB1,

without any function active.
18
The cursor will change to when you are in the move mode.

Editing an Existing Dimension

There are two possible pop-up menus that can be displayed when working
with an existing dimension.
• One pop-up menu appears when selecting a dimension (outside of
dimension creation) with MB3.
• The other pop–up menu appears when you double-click with MB1 on
an existing dimension (while in or outside of the dimension function)
and then click MB3.
18
When you access this pop–up menu, the dimension bar also appears in
the upper left hand corner.
The cursor will change to indicate that you are in the editing mode.

If you again double-click (with MB1) on the selected dimension, you will
access the Dimension Style dialog.
Changing the Precision of a Dimension
There are a few ways to change the precision of an existing dimension. After
double-clicking on the dimension:
• Choose MB3→Nominal Precision.
• Choose the precision from the icon option bar.
• Press the number on the keyboard.
Inheriting Preferences from an Existing Dimension
After a dimension has been created, to edit its preference setting to that of
another existing dimension:
• Double-click (with MB1) on the dimension that is to change.
18
• Click MB3 on the dimension and choose Inherit.
• Select the dimension that has the desired preference settings.
Deleting Dimensions
You can use the dimension pop-up menu to delete a dimension or you can
select the dimension(s) to delete, and use the Delete icon.

Activity — Creating Dimensions

In this activity, you will create several dimensions using various settings.
Step 1: Open the drafting_fitting_dwg part.
This is a non-master part. The master model part (drafting_fitting)
Step 3: Verify that the work layer is 101. (Format→Layer Settings)
Step 4: Create a Horizontal dimension.
Choose the Inferred Dimension icon in the Dimension

toolbar. (Insert→Dimension→Inferred)
Select near the end points of the solid edges.
18
If you select the wrong object, press the Escape key on

the keyboard to deselect, and select again.
Place the dimension by clicking MB1 at the desired location.

If you need to change the style of an existing dimension,
double-click it (to select it), then double-click it again
to display the Dimension Style dialog.

Step 5: Create a Vertical dimension.

The dimension you are about to create is based upon the selection
of a linear centerline, not the arc centers. This allows the gap to
be displayed between the centerline symbol and the dimension
extension lines.
Select the centerline symbol.
Choose Equal Bilateral Tolerance in the Dimension bar in the

upper left corner of the graphics window.
Choose 1 decimal place for the Tolerance Precision in the

Dimension bar.
18

Choose Tolerance Values.
Key in .1 for the Tolerance and press Enter.
Place the dimension.
Click MB2 to cancel vertical dimension creation.
The Tolerance Type, Precision, and Value can also be

changed using the MB3 pop-up menu after selecting the
object(s) to dimension.
Step 6: Create a Cylindrical dimension for the diameter of the boss.

This dimension requires that you append text in front of the
diameter symbol.
18
Choose the Cylindrical icon in the Dimensions toolbar.

(Insert→Dimension→Cylindrical)

Select the two edges of the boss (in any order).
Before placing the dimension, choose

MB3→Appended Text→Before.
In the dynamic input field, key in 2X and press the Enter key.
You also need to adjust the placement before you establish the
dimension. You can do this with the MB3 pop-up menu.
Choose MB3→Placement→Arrows In.
Place the dimension as shown.
Step 7: Align a dimension with an existing dimension.
18

Select the two edges as shown below.
Choose Reset. The appended text is no longer needed.
Pass the cursor over the dimension.
Locate the dimension so that the alignment line indicates that

it is aligned with the dimension above it.
18
Click MB2 to exit the dimension function.
Step 8: Close all parts and do not save.

Text Creation
The Annotation Editor is used to create notes, labels, and GD&T symbols.
You can access the Annotation Editor interface by:
• Choosing the Annotation Editor icon from the Drafting Annotation

toolbar.
• Choosing Insert→Annotation.
The Annotation icon option bar and the edit window will be displayed in the
graphics window. However, the small edit window can be enlarged and moved.
1 — Annotation Bar
2 — Edit Window
3 — Annotation Placement Toolbar
18

Creating Notes
The Annotation bar is stationary. It will always remain in the upper left
hand corner.
You can use it to:

1 — Access the full Annotation Editor dialog
2 — Change the Style for the annotation being created.
3 — Insert a special symbol.
4 — Insert a GD&T symbol.
5 — Insert a datum symbol.
The above options are also available while locating an annotation, by using
MB3 on the graphics window.
The Edit Window, found in the upper left hand corner of the graphics window
is also called the "Dynamic Mini-Text Box" because it lets you enter text and
symbols for your notes and labels. The Edit window contains some default
text (which is highlighted).
18
Because this is a window, you can drag any side or corner to change its size or
drag the entire window to a different location. Also, you’ll see horizontal and
vertical scroll bars appear whenever they are required.

The Annotation Placement toolbar works the same as it does for dimensions.
Entering Text
To enter text, begin typing over the highlighted text in the Edit window.
You can use CTRL-i, CTRL-b, and CTRL-u to for italics, bold, and
underlined text as you compose the note.
It also appears on the cursor as a placement image.
After you locate the text, it remains in the edit window for you to use again or
edit for the next annotation.
You can also create a note on a drawing by dragging a .txt file from
an operating system window to the drawing.
18

Creating Leaders on Notes and Labels
To create a leader, do the following:

• Key in the desired text.
• Locate the cursor on the curve/edge/face where you want the arrowhead
located (with the cursor displayed as shown below).
If you want the leader to point to empty space instead of an object

use the same procedure. The only difference is that the cursor will
not display in a “ leader” mode if an object is not selected.
• Press (and hold down) MB1 and drag the cursor away from the selection
point. A temporary display of the leader will be shown on the screen.
18 • Click MB1 at the location for the text.
If you want a second leader, repeat the second and third steps before defining
a text location with MB1.
You can quickly change a leader location by clicking MB3 over the
leader, choosing Edit Associativity, and specifying the new location.

Activity — Creating Notes and Labels
In this activity, you will create notes and labels on a drawing.
Step 1: Open the drafting_fitting_dwg part.

This is a non-master part. The master model part (drafting_fitting)
Step 3: Verify your current work layer is set to 101.

Step 4: Create a note.
Choose the Annotation Editor icon. (Insert→Annotation)

The Annotation Bar, Edit window, and Annotation Placement
Toolbar will be displayed.
18
Press Backspace to remove the text from the Edit window.
Key in your name into the Edit Window. It will be placed in

the title block.
There are no limits on the number of characters per line,

or the total number of characters that can be entered.

Step 5: Place the note on the drawing.

Zoom in on the Title block.
Drag the note to the desired location on the drawing,

and indicate the placement by clicking MB1.
Because you are currently using the system defaults for the
Lettering preferences, the text alignment position is located at the
mid-center of the note.
Notice that the text remains behind the cursor in the
graphics window. The text will continue to follow the
cursor until the Edit window is closed.
Step 6: Create a label.

In capital letters, key in the following text in the Edit window.
OMIT PAINT FOR
ELECTRICAL BONDING
Click and hold down MB1 on the phantom circle in the front
view and drag the text until you see a leader; release MB1.
Click MB1 once again to place the label as shown below.
18
Click MB2 to close the editor.
Step 7: Do not close the part, it will be used in the next activity.

The Annotation Editor
The Annotation Editor creates notes or labels consisting of text and drafting
symbols. You can include the following in a note or label:
• Drafting symbols
• Fractions and two-line text
• GD&T symbols
• User-Defined symbols
• Expression values
• Part and Object Attributes
You can access the Annotation Editor dialog by choosing the Annotation
Editor icon from the Drafting Annotation icon option bar.
18

The Annotation Editor dialog will be displayed.
18
1 — Toolbar
2 — Text Entry Window
3 — Preview Window (Show Preview icon must be selected)
4 — Symbol Display and Text Preference Options

As you enter text and symbols, the text and control characters appear within
the Text Entry Window. In this window you may use the formatting options
available on the Toolbar to customize the appearance of your text.
For example, you may want your name to appear as italic, underlined
letters. As you type, the text will appear in the graphics window and in the
annotation editor preview window (if turned on) as shown.
18

Annotation Editor Tools
The Annotation Editor dialog contains several options for text formatting.
Some of the more common options are described below.
1 — Clears the display in the text entry and preview area.

2 — Opens (or closes) the preview area.
3 — Text font.
4 — Text scale factor.
5 — Options to add text attributes (bold, italicized, underlined, superscript,
subscript)
6 — Deletes text attributes.
18

Editing Notes
You can edit text in a previously created note or label by selecting it from the
drawing and using the MB3 pop-up menu.
You get the following menu:
You can also edit annotation objects by double-clicking (with MB1) on the note
or label. You can also use MB1 to select multiple objects (but this will reduce
the options available on the MB3 pop-up menu).
Helper Lines
Helper lines act as a guide that allows you to line up notes, labels, dimensions,
symbols, and views to other drawing objects on the drawing. Helper lines
appear as a dashed line.
To use helper lines, move the cursor over the object to
which you want to align as you are placing the new
annotation. The note highlights and helper lines appear.
18
Press and release MB1 to place the annotation at the desired location.

Activity — Creating More Notes
In this activity, you will creating more notes on a drawing.

Step 1: Continue using drafting_fitting_dwg.
Step 2: Create a note.
Choose the Annotation Editor icon. (Insert→Annotation)
In capital letters, key in the note shown below.

NOTE: 1) DIMENSIONS AND
TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5M-1994.
2) BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES.
Place the text in the lower left corner of the drawing as shown
below by clicking MB1 at that location.
Step 3: Create another note using the Annotation Editor dialog.

Choose the Annotation Editor icon from the icon option bar in
the upper left corner of the graphics window.
18
Choose the Clear icon in the dialog to clear any text in

the editor.

Verify the Font is set to blockfont and the change the Character
Scale Factor to 1.75.
In capital letters, enter the text for the drawing number

05-FIT-2475.
Locate the drawing number in the title block as shown below.
Step 4: Complete the title block.
Choose Clear on the Annotation Editor dialog.
Key in: 1/1
Place the text in the Scale area of the title block.
Key in 2DAY.
Pass the cursor over 1/1 so that a dashed alignment help line
is shown.
Place the text in the “Date” area of the title block.
Complete the Title Block by adding the sheet numbers.

18
Close the Editor and click MB2 to exit.
Step 5: Change the date on the drawing to today’s date.

Click MB3 on the date 2DAY in the title block.

Choose Edit Text from the pop-up menu.
Highlight 2DAY in the Edit Window and type in today’s date

(MM-DD-YY).
Click MB2 to close the Edit Window.
Step 6: Reposition the date.

Using MB1, drag the date so that the right end fits inside the
box.
Notice how it maintains alignment with the scale note.
If required, drag the 1/1 note down so that the date does not
lay on top of the word “DATE”.
18

Master Model Drawing Guidelines

1. Open the master model part. (File→Open)
2. Start the Assemblies application (Start→Assemblies)
3. Create a new parent part

(Assemblies→Components→Create New Parent,
xxxxx_dwg)
As an alternative, you could create a ’drawing’ file using a
seed part and then add the master model as a component
(Assemblies→Components→Add Existing).
4. Start the Drafting application (Start→Drafting)
5. Adjust the sheet; name, units, size, projection angle (Edit→Sheet)
6. Add the drawing formats; title block, border, revision block, standard
notes (Site dependent)
7. Set View Display Preferences; hidden line removal, section backgrounds,

threads (Preferences→View)
8. Add the base view, typically top or front (Insert→View→Base View and
choose the view to add)
9. Add more views; projected, detail, section, isometric, exploded

(Insert→View)
10. Adjust the view display; size, orientation, etc. (Edit→Style or Edit→View)
11. Clean up individual views with view dependent edits; erase object, edit
entire object, edit object segment (Edit→View→View Dependent Edit)
12. Add the Utility Symbols; centerlines, target symbols, intersection symbols
18
13. Add the dimensions (Insert→Dimension)
14. Add the notes, labels, and GD&T symbols (Insert→Annotation)

Summary
The Drafting Application provides for the creation of drawings. Views and
dimensions that are placed on a drawing are associative to the solid model
and update when changes are made to the model.
The Annotation Editor interface makes it easy to create, edit and delete notes
and labels. The annotation bar and edit window allows you to work with
notes and labels without opening the Annotation Editor dialog.
In this lesson you:
• Modified a drawing.
• Added views to a drawing.
• Created Utility Symbols.
• Created Dimensions.
• Added annotation to a drawing.
18

Appendix
A Additional Projects
This appendix contains Additional Projects for you to work on.
©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX A-1

Additional Projects
Project 1
A-2 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

Additional Projects
Project 2

Additional Projects
Project 3

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 4

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 5

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 6

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 7

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 8

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 9

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 10

Additional Projects
Project 11

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 12

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 13

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 14

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 15

Additional Projects
Project 16

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 17

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 18

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 19

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 20

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 21

Additional Projects

Additional Projects
Project 22

Additional Projects

A
Appendix
B Expression Operators
Overview
The following information lists the various operators that may be used in
expressions.
B
©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX B-1
Expression Operators
Operators
There are several types of operators that you may use in the expression
language.
Arithmetic Operators Example

+ Addition p2=p5+p3
- Subtraction and Negative Sign p2=p5–p3
* Multiplication p2=p5*p3
/ Division p2=p5/p3
% Modulus p2=p5%p3
^ Exponential p2=p5^2
= Assignment p2=p5
Relational and Boolean Operators

> Greater Than
< Less Than
>= Greater Than or Equal
<= Less Than or Equal
== Equal
!= Not Equal
! Negate
& or && Logical AND
| or || Logical OR
B
B-2 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4
Precedence and Associativity

In the table below, operators in the same row have equal precedence while
operators in the following rows have less precedence.
Precedence and Associativity

Operators Associativity
^ Right to Left
– (change sign)
* / % Left to Right
+ –
> < >= <=
== !=
&&
||
= Right to Left
When using operators with the same precedence in an equation without

parameters, use left-to-right or the right-to-left rule from the table. For
example:
X = 90 – 10 + 30 = 110 (not 50)
X = 90 – (10 + 30) = 50
B
Legacy Unit Conversion

Although when dimensionality is specified and units are assigned the
system handles conversions, legacy parts may have used functions for unit
conversion. For legacy compatibility these functions are supported.
Functions for Unit Conversion

cm cm(x) converts x from centimeters to the default units of the part
ft ft(x) converts x from feet to the default units of the part
grd grd(x) converts x from gradients to degrees
in in(x) converts x from inches to the default units of the part
km km(x) converts x from kilometers to the default units of the part
mc mc(x) converts x from microns to the default units of the part
min min(x) converts x from minutes to degrees.
ml ml(x) converts x from mils to the default units of the part
mm mm(x) converts x from millimeters to the default units of the part
mtr mtr(x) converts x from meters to the default units of the part
sec sec(x) converts x from seconds to degrees
yd yd(x) converts x from yards to the default units of the part
B
Built-in Functions
Built-in functions include math, string, and engineering functions.
Scientific Notation
You may optionally enter numbers in scientific notation. The value you enter
must contain a positive or negative sign. For example, you can enter:
2e+5 which is the same as the value 200000
2e-5 which is the same as the value .00002
Built-in Functions
abs Returns the absolute value of a given number
arccos Returns the inverse cosine of a given number in degrees
arcsin Returns the inverse sine of a given number in degrees
arctan Returns the inverse tangent of a given number in degrees
from –90 to +90
arctan2 Returns the inverse tangent of a given delta x divided by a
given delta y in degrees from –180 to +180
ASCII Returns the ASCII code of the first character in a given
string or zero if the string is empty
ceiling Returns the smallest integer that is bigger than a given
number
Char Returns the ASCII character for a given integer in the
range 1 to 255
charReplace Returns a new string from a given source string, character
to replace and the corresponding replacement characters.
compareString Case sensitive compare of two strings
cos Returns the cosine of a given number in degrees
dateTimeString Returns the system date and time in the format “Fri Nov
21 09:56:12 2005\n”
floor Returns the largest integer less than or equal to a given
number
format Returns a formatted string, using C-style formatting
specification
getenv Returns the string value of a given environment variable
string
hypcos Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a given number
hypsin Returns the hyperbolic sine of a given number
hyptan Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a given number
B
Built-in Functions
log Returns the natural logarithm of a given number
log10 Returns the logarithm base 10 of a given number
MakeNumber Returns the number or integer of a given numerical string
max Returns the largest number from a given number and
additional numbers
min Returns the smallest number from a given number and
additional numbers
mod Returns the remainder (modulus) when a given numerator
is divided by a given denominator (by integer division)
NormalizeAngle Normalizes a given angle (degrees) to be between 0 and
360 degrees
pi() Returns pi
Radians Converts an angle in degrees into radians
replaceString Replaces all occurrences of str1 with str2
round Returns the integer nearest to a given number, returns the
even integer if the given number ends in .5
sin Returns the sine of a given number in degrees
sqrt Returns the inverse square root of a given positive number
StringLower Returns a lowercase string from a given string
StringUpper Returns an uppercase string from a given string
StringValue Returns a string containing a textual representation of a
given value
subString Returns a new string containing a subset of the elements
from the original list
tan Returns the sine of a given number
ug_ functions see the documentation for descriptions of dozens more
specialized math and engineering functions
B
C
Appendix
C Point Constructor Options
Overview
This appendix describes the various Point Constructor methods that may
be used.
The Point Constructor dialog provides a standard way to specify points. It
allows the creation of point objects as well as the determination of locations
in three-dimensional space.
Points may be specified in one of two ways: either choose one of the provided,
icons at the top of the dialog, or directly enter the X-Y-Z coordinates in the
fields provided.
©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX C-1

Point Constructor Options
C
Methods to Specify a Point
The top of the Point Constructor dialog displays icons representing various
methods for specifying a point. As the cursor is passed over these icons, the
icon block displays the name of the method.
The icon methods are described below.
Inferred Point
Depending on where you select when using this option, one of the following
single selection options will be used: cursor location, existing point, end
point, mid point or arc center. This option does not require a selection of the
particular point type for each selection.
Cursor Location
Use this option to construct points anywhere on the screen by positioning the
cross hairs and indicating a location. The location defined lies on the WCS
Work plane.
To locate points quickly and precisely, use a grid (see Preferences→Work
Plane →Show Grid). When Snap to Grid is on, points snap to the nearest
grid position. The grid spacing may be set as desired. The spacing in the
X-direction does not need to be the same as the spacing in the Y-direction.
For example, if the smallest increment on the part is in eighths of an inch
(.125), then the grid spacing would be set to .125. A point at exactly one inch
in X and two inches in Y could be created by counting over eight grid points in
X and up sixteen in Y and indicating a screen position.
Existing Point
Use this option to specify a location by selecting an existing point.

Remember that the point constructor allows locations in model space to
be specified. In the instance where an existing point is being selected it is
generally a case of using that point to aid in the construction of another object
such as a the endpoint of a line, or the location of an object, such as placement
of a drawing border.
C-2 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

C
End Point
Use this option to specify locations at the end points of existing lines (1),
arcs (2), conics (3), and splines (4).
When selecting geometry, place the selection ball near the end point (1) you
wish to select. The point is located at the end of the curve nearest to where it
was selected (see below). Closed curves, such as complete circles, have only
one endpoint because the two ends are at the same coordinate location.

C
Control Point
Use this option to locate points at the control points of geometric objects. The
control points, which vary for each object type, include: Existing points, End
points of conics, End points and Mid points of open arcs, Center points of
circles or arcs, Mid points and End points of lines, and End points or Knot
points of splines.
Use the cursor to select objects. Since some objects have more than one
control point, place the cross hairs near the control point desired. The system
locates the control point nearest the position where the curve is selected.
The illustration below shows the various locations of control points on
existing lines (1), arcs (2), conics (3), and splines (4).

C
Intersection Point
Use this option to locate a position at the intersection of two curves or at the
intersection of a curve and a surface or plane. If the curves intersect more
than once, the system creates the point nearest to where the second curve
was selected.
When two selected curves are not coplanar with the XC-YC plane the system
creates the point on the first curve (1) selected. By projecting the second
curve (2) parallel to the ZC axis an apparent intersection is calculated and
the point (3) is defined on the first object selected (see below). Projections
are always done along the ZC-axis.
ZC
YC
XC
Positions may be indicated at the intersection of any two non-parallel curves.

Implied intersections may be located even if the objects do not actually touch
(see below).

C
Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center
Use this option to specify a position at the center of an arc or ellipse by

selecting the arc along its circumference.
In the example below, selecting with the circumference (1) of the large circle
within the selection ball defines the center point (2) of the large circle.
Selecting near the center of the large circle (1) will not select the center of
the large circle since the selection ball touches the circumference of the
small circle.

C
Angle on Arc/Ellipse
Use this option to locate a position (1) at an angular location on an arc or

an ellipse.
The angle value is entered in degrees. The angle is referenced from the
positive XC axis and is measured counterclockwise in the WCS. The angular
position on the arc or ellipse may also be defined on the unconstructed portion
(2) of an arc or ellipse.

C
Quadrant Point
Use this option to locate positions at the quarter points of an arc or an ellipse.
Points may be located at the starting point of the arc or ellipse and then
at quarter-distance intervals along the object. The point located (1) is the
quadrant point nearest to the position selected (2). The quadrant position
may also be defined on the unconstructed portion (3) of an arc.

C
Point on Curve/Edge
Use this option to locate positions on a curve or edge by specifying a U

Parameter.
After choosing this option and selecting a curve or edge, the Point Constructor
dialog will display an entry field for a U Parameter.
The U Parameter can be a value between 0 and 1 where a value of 0 would be

the start and a value of 1 would be the end of the curve or edge.

C
Point on Surface
Use this option to locate positions on a surface (face) by specifying a U

Paremeter and a V Parameter.
After choosing this option and selecting a face, the Point Constructor dialog
will display entry fields for the U and V Parameters.
The U and V Parameters can have values between 0 and 1 to define the
location on the face.

C
WCS and Absolute Coordinates
Choose WCS or Absolute to specify the coordinate system to reference when
entering values in the Base Point fields. The WCS (Work Coordinate System)
is the default. The WCS may be moved to any location and placed in any
orientation. The absolute coordinate system is a fixed coordinate system.
Reset
The Reset button sets the values X, Y, and Z coordinates of the Base Point to
0 and sets the Offset method to None.

C
Offset
This option allows you to specify a position in model space offset from a
reference position. The offset may be specified in several different methods.
Once an offset method has been specified, it remains in effect until another
one is chosen. The default is None (no offset).
Rectangular Offset
This option allows a position to be offset by keying in values that represent

the X, Y, and Z directions relative to the coordinate system specified from a
reference point (see below).
The location of the offset point (1) relative to the reference point (2) is
determined by the coordinate system (3) selected and the orientation of that
coordinate system.
The origin of the coordinate system has no effect on the offset.

C
Cylindrical Offset
This option allows an offset point (1) to be specified by keying in cylindrical
coordinates.
The offset values for Radius (2), Angle (3), and Delta-ZC (4) are defined
relative to the specified coordinate system and applied as illustrated below.
The radius and the angle always lie in the X-Y plane of the coordinate system
specified.
A cylindrical offset may reference either the absolute coordinate system or
the work coordinate system.
ZC
YC
XC
Spherical Offset
This option allows specification of an offset position using spherical
coordinates, two angles and a radius (see below).
Angle 1 always lies in the X-Y plane, and Angle 2 defines the elevation of the
offset point from the X-Y plane. The radius defines the distance between the
base point and the offset point. A spherical offset may reference either the
work coordinate system or the absolute coordinate system.
Z
Y

C
Vector Offset
This option allows specification of an offset point (1) by indicating a direction

and distance (2). A vector (3) is defined by selecting a line (4). The direction of
that vector is determined by which end of the line is selected.
Z
Y
Offset Along Curve
This option allows an offset point (1) to be defined along a curve by a specified
arc length distance or a percentage of the total curve path length.
The direction of the offset is determined by the where the curve is selected
relative to reference point. In the example below, the reference point (1) is
in the middle of the curve. Selecting the curve at position (2) to produce
direction (3) and selecting at position (4) to produces direction (5).

Appendix
D Customer Defaults
D
Overview
There are utilities and customization files which affect the default interface
and behavior of NX. This appendix covers these topics which would normally
be the responsibility of a system administrator.
©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX D-1

Customer Defaults
Customer Defaults
Customer defaults are accessed by choosing
File→Utilities→Customer Defaults.
D When NX is first started (out-of-the-box) the defaults are set to User and a
variable points to a user file which may or may not exist. This is an extract
from the log file for a user named “nxuser” after logging in and starting NX
for the first time:
Processing customer default values file
C:/Documents and Settings/nxuser
/Local Settings/Application Data/Unigraphics Solutions
/NX4/nx4_user.dpv
User customizations file
C:/Documents and Settings/nxuser
/Local Settings/Application Data/Unigraphics Solutions
/NX4/nx4_user.dpv does not exist
The fact that the file does not exist is of no concern because the path is
writable for the person logged in.
NX will create the file nx4_user.dpv when and if the user makes a change to
the defaults.
If the administrator wishes to prevent the user from changing the defaults,
i.e., set them as User (Read Only), there are various ways to accomplish it:
• Create the file and customize it as you wish, and then make it read only.
• Define the file in a path to which the user cannot write. The file and the
path need not exist.
• Lock one or more defaults at a higher level, i.e. group or site level.
D-2 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

Customer Defaults
Customer Defaults Levels
There are three levels of defaults that your system administrator can set.
These are site, group, and user. Any of all of these levels may be read-write,
although it is customary to set the site and group levels to read only. D
At the Site and Group levels the dialog displays padlocks beside each default,
enabling the administrator to lock out a particular default for lower levels.
When a lock is active not only is the text de-emphasized but value change
is prohibited. Even if the site (or a lower) DPV file is writable the value of
a locked default can not be changed until the lock icon has been toggled off
for the given default).

Customer Defaults
For example, to lock out the ability to create promotions, the administrator
clicks the lock beside promotions at the site or group level. The icon changes
color and the text is de-emphasized.
At the user level, that default is de-emphasized an a padlock is displayed

beside it.

Customer Defaults
The system administrator can use the Default Lock Status to set the global
locked status for all of the customer defaults on all defaults pages. This
allows strategies like All are locked except..." or All are unlocked except...
instead of requiring the assertion of 5000+ individual locks.
D
Locks at the group level change color and the text is de-emphasized.
The user then sees all options for Site Standards de-emphasized and
padlocked. No Site Standards may now may be changed at the user level.

Customer Defaults
Setting Customer Defaults

Customer defaults have as-shipped default settings that are hard-coded.
When you change defaults at any level (assuming you have write permission
D and the levels are defined) a file is created to save the settings. By default the
file is called nx4_user.dpv, nx4_group.dpv, or nx4_site.dpv.
Only the defaults that are changed from the hard–coded settings are saved,
thus the DPV files can be very small in size.
Customer defaults files are defined by environment settings. These are
typically set in ugii_env.dat on Windows systems or .ugii_env on UNIX;
however, the administrator may prevent a user from spoofing these settings
by creating a file named ugii_env.master in the UGII directory where NX
is installed to define these particular environment settings. When this file
exists any attempt to redefine the environment variables will be ignored.
When you change defaults the changes are NOT effective immediately.
They will be in effect the next time NX is started.

Customer Defaults
There are two possible settings for the user level and one each for the group
and site levels:
Variable Description
Defaults File Heading
D
UGII_LOCAL_USER_DEFAULTS This variable is a fully qualified file
MISCELLANEOUS specification: it can be any file name
in any location.
The recommended file extension is
.dpv
The file need not exist. The file
will be created when the initial
customizations are saved.
The directory path must exist and be
writeable to create the file.
UGII_USER_DIR This directory pointed to must have
UGALLIANCE Variables the startup directory defined in
structure outlined below. The file
nx4_user.dpv will be created when the
initial customizations are saved (if it
does not already exist) in the startup
folder.
Define this ONLY
if UGII_LOCAL
_USER_DEFAULTS is NOT
defined.
UGII_GROUP_DIR The file nx4_group.dpv will be created
Not defined when the initial customizations are
saved (if it does not already exist) in
the startup folder under the directory
pointed to.
UGII_SITE_DIR The file nx4_site.dpv will be created
UGALLIANCE Variables when the initial customizations are
saved (if it does not already exist) in
the startup folder under the directory
pointed to.

Customer Defaults
USER, GROUP, and SITE directories
There is a standard structure for customer site installation of menu files and
shared libraries. This directory structure defines three subdirectories. For
D the purpose of this discussion only the startup folder need exist; however, you
might encounter the others if you have site customization.
startup Contains site-specific menu files, defaults files, and shared

libraries of menu actions to be loaded automatically at NX
startup to customize Gateway.
application Contains site-specific files defining menus and shared
libraries of menu actions for customizing NX or third-party
applications, such as NX Open programs. Loading of each
shared library is deferred until you enter the application that
names the library on the LIBRARIES statement in the menu
file definition for the Application Button for the application.
User Tool Definition files, GRIP programs, User Function
programs that are referenced by menu file actions.
udo Contains the shared libraries defining methods for
site-specific User Defined Objects (another NX Open topic.)

Customer Defaults
Managing Your Changes
The DPV files contain only the defaults that are changed from the hard–coded
settings.
You may review your changes at any time: D
• Set the Defaults Level to the level you want to examine, Site, Group,
or User.
• Choose Manage Current Settings on the Customer Defaults dialog.
Here is an example of standard classroom defaults at the group level:
Here is an example of defaults additionally set for Design Applications using

NX.

Customer Defaults
Updating to a New Release of NX
To update to a new release, you need only define the DPV files you want to
use at whatever levels your organization uses.
D When you receive the new software use Import Defaults to validate your
previous settings against the new release.

Importing Customer Defaults values file: <full path specification of DPV
file.>
Total settings and locks imported: 10
Total settings rejected due to values not valid in this release: 0
Total settings rejected due to values being locked at the higher level: 0
Total settings already set to the same value and lock status: 0
Total settings not recognized in this release: 0

Index
A DPV . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6

Absolute Coordinate System . . . . . . 3-3 Files . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . D-3, D-6
Alignment Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Setting Levels .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Analysis Cylinder . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Mass Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 D
Annotation Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37
preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-47 Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43
Annotation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-67 Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43
Applications Intersection of 2 Faces . . . . . . . 12-42
Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Through Cylindrical Face Axis . . 12-41
Assemblies Through Edge or Curve . . . . . . 12-40
Selecting Components . . . . . . . . 10-15 Through Two Points . . . . . . . . . 12-39
Assemblies Application . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Add Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Assembly Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Angle to Face Thru Edge . . . . . . 12-10
Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Offset at a Distance . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
B Point and Direction . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tangent to Cylindrical
Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11–12-12
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Through a Point on Curve . . . . . 12-14
Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Through Cylindrical Axis . . . . . . 12-9
Bottom-Up Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Through Three Points . . . . . . . . 12-13
Delay Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
C Delayed Update after Edit . . . . . . 15-21
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Delete Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Change Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Design in Context . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Dimensions
WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-45
CSYS Constructor dialog . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Cue line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Distance between objects . . . . . . . . 9-11
Customer Defaults DOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
Directory Structures . . . . . . . . . . . D-8 Drafting Application . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX Index-1

Index
Drawings I
adding a base view . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
adding projected views . . . . . . . 18-24 Infer Constraint Settings . . . . . . . 13-21
creating new sheets . . . . . . . . . . 18-3 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7 Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
deleting views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-27 Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
editing views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-26 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4 Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
view preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17
L
E
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Moving Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Edit Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Load Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Load Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
with Rollback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Load States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Evaluate Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
M
Exit NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Expressions Make Current Feature . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Dialog with less options . . . . . . . . 6-3 Mass Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Dialog with more options . . . . . . . 6-4 Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
List Referencers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
List References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
precedence and associativity . . . . . B-3 Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14 Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Vary Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
F Mouse Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Mouse Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Feature Coordinate System . . . . . . . 5-3 Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Orient View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
G Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Gateway Application . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Set Rotate Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
H Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Move Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Index-2 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

Index
N Quick Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34

QuickPick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Notes and Labels
annotation editor . . . . . . . . . . . 18-67
R
O Reattach a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Opening Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Reference Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Reference Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51
P Referencing Existing Parameters . . 5-28
Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Reposition Component . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Parameter Entry Options . . . . . . . . 5-28 Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Part S
Change Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Selection
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 QuickPick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Selection Intent
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . 5-42, 9-8, 15-3 curve/edge rules . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
Placement Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Point Constructor dialog . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Follow Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
Positioning selecting sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Edit Stop at Intersection . . . . . . . . . 14-23
Add Dimension . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Delete Dimension . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Show/Remove Constraints . . . . . . 13-66
Edit Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Sketch
Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Constraining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
Positioning Methods Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-63
Angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Convert To/From Reference . . . . 13-92
Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-13
Line onto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Curve Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Parallel at a Distance . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
Point onto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Point onto Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
Preferences Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-47 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-51
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17 Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Preview Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Reference Direction . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Show/Remove Constraints . . . . 13-66
Q
Text Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36 Sketch Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX Index-3

Index
Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Update Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8

positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Update Model . . . . . . . . . . 13-57, 15-21
Snap Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Utility Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-33
Snap Point toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 cylindrical centerline . . . . . . . . 18-40
Starting NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 linear centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-36
Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 V
Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . 4-8
Sweep Along Guide . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
View Preferences . . . . . . ... . . . . 18-17
Symbols
Edges Hidden by Edges .. . . . . 18-18
utility symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-33
Hidden Lines . . . . . . . ... . . . . 18-18
linear centerline . . . . . . . . . 18-36
Smooth Edges . . . . . . . ... . . . . 18-19
Virtual Intersections . . ... . . . . 18-20
T
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
W
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19, 10-16 Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Snap Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Top-Down Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
U
Unite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Index-4 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

UGS Education Services offers a blend of training L
solutions for all of our product lifecycle management E
products. A
Our Online Store “Learning Advantage” was R
developed to provide our customers with “just in time” N
training for the latest in application developments. I
N
Here are some of the Learning Advantages: G
• Customers have direct access
• Self-paced course layout
A
• Online Assessments
D
• Just in time training for the latest release
V
A
N
T
To learn more about the “Learning Advantage” visit A
our website http://training.ugs.com or email us at G
training @ugs.com E
This page left blank intentionally.
STUDENT PROFILE
In order to stay in tune with our customers we ask for some background information. This information will be kept
confidential and will not be shared with anyone outside of Education Services.
Please “Print”…
Your Name U.S. citizen Yes No
Course Title/Dates / thru
Hotel/motel you are staying at during your training
Planned departure time on last day of class
Employer Location
Your title and job responsibilities /
Industry: Auto Aero Consumer products Machining Tooling Medical Other
Types of products/parts/data that you work with
Reason for training

Please verify/add to this list of training for Unigraphics, I-deas, Imageware, Teamcenter Mfg., Teamcenter Eng. (I-Man), Teamcenter
Enterprise (Metaphase), or Dimensional Mgmt./Visualization. Medium means Instructor-lead (IL), On-line (OL), or Self-paced (SP)
Software From Whom When Course Name Medium
Other CAD/CAM/CAE /PDM software you have used

Please “check”! your ability/knowledge in the following…
Subject None Novice Intermediate Advanced
CAD modeling
CAD assemblies
CAD drafting
CAM
CAE
PDM – data management
PDM – system management
Platform (operating system)
Thank you for your participation and we hope your training experience will be an outstanding one.
Practical Applications of NX Course Agenda
Monday Morning
• Introduction & Overview
• Lesson 1. Getting Started
• Lesson 2. The NX User Interface
Afternoon
• Lesson 3. Coordinate Systems
• Lesson 4. Introduction to Solid Modeling
• Lesson 5. Positional Form Features
• Lesson 6. Expressions
Tuesday Morning
• Lesson 7. Shell
• Lesson 8. Edge Operations
• Workbook Project Description & Section 1 Rear Differential Modeling
• Lesson 9. Model Construction Query
Afternoon
• Lesson 10. Introduction to Assemblies
• Lesson 11. Adding Components & Mating Conditions
• Workbook Section 2 Rear Differential Assembly
Wednesday Morning
• Lesson 12. Datum Features
• Workbook Section 3 Rear Axle Modeling and Assembly
• Workbook Section 4 Left Pinion Modeling and Assembly
Afternoon
• Lesson 13. Sketching
Thursday Morning
• Lesson 14. Swept Features and Boolean Operations
• Workbook Section 5 Power Pack Sketching
• Workbook Section 6 Rear Drive Gear Modeling
Afternoon
• Workbook Section 7 Part and Assembly Editing
• Lesson 15. Editing the Model
• Lesson 16. Instance Arrays
• Workbook Section 8 Rear Drive Gear Completion
Friday Morning
• Workbook Section 9 Assembly Completion
• Lesson 17. The Master Model
• Lesson 18. Introduction to Drafting
Afternoon
• Workbook Section 10 Rear Differential Drafting
Accelerators
The following Accelerators can be listed from within an NX session by choosing
Information→Custom Menubar→Accelerators.
Function Accelerator
File→New... Ctrl+N
File→Open... Ctrl+O
File→Save Ctrl+S
File→Save As... Ctrl+Shift+A
File→Plot... Ctrl+P
File→Execute→Grip... Ctrl+G
File→Execute→Debug Grip... Ctrl+Shift+G
File→Execute→NX Open... Ctrl+U
Edit→Undo Ctrl+Z
Edit→Cut Ctrl+X
Edit→Copy Ctrl+C
Edit-Paste Ctrl+V
Edit→Delete... Ctrl+D or Delete
Edit→Selection→Top Selection Priority - Feature F
Edit→Selection→Top Selection Priority - Face G
Edit→Selection→Top Selection Priority - Body B
Edit→Selection→Top Selection Priority - Edge E
Edit→Selection→Top Selection Priority - Component C
Edit→Selection-Select All Ctrl+A
Edit→Blank→Blank... Ctrl+B
Edit→Blank→Reverse Blank All Ctrl+Shift+B
Edit→Blank→Unblank Selected... Ctrl+Shift+K
Edit→Blank→Unblank All of Part Ctrl+Shift+U
Edit→Transform... Ctrl+T
Edit→Object Display... Ctrl+J
View→Operation→Zoom... Ctrl+Shift+Z
View→Operation→Rotate... Ctrl+R
View→Operation→Section... Ctrl+H
View→Layout→New... Ctrl+Shift+N
View→Layout→Open... Ctrl+Shift+O
View→Layout→Fit All Views Ctrl+Shift+F
View→Visualization→High Quality Image... Ctrl+Shift+H
View→Information Window F4
View→Current Dialog F3
View→Reset Orientation Ctrl+F8
Insert→Sketch... S
Insert→Design Feature→Extrude... X
Insert→Design Feature→Revolve... R
Insert→Trim→Trimmed Sheet... T
Insert→Sweep→Variational Sweep... V
Format→Layer Settings... Ctrl+L
Format→Visible in View... Ctrl+Shift+V
Format→WCS→Display W
Tools→Expression... Ctrl+E
Tools→Journal→Play... Alt+F8
Tools→Journal→Edit Alt+F11
Tools→Macro→Start Record... Ctrl+Shift+R
Tools→Macro→Playback... Ctrl+Shift+P
Tools→Macro→Step... Ctrl+Shift+S
Information→Object... Ctrl+I
Analysis→Curve→Refresh Curvature Graphs Ctrl+Shift+C
Preferences→Object... Ctrl+Shift+J
Preferences→Selection... Ctrl+Shift+T
Start→Modeling... M or Ctrl+M
Start→All Applications→Shape Studio... Ctrl+Alt+S
Start→Drafting... Ctrl+Shift+D
Start→Manufacturing... Ctrl+Alt+M
Start→NX Sheet Metal... Ctrl+Alt+N
Start→Assemblies A
Start→Gateway... Ctrl+W
Help→On Context... F1
Refresh F5
Fit Ctrl+F
Zoom F6
Rotate F7
Orient View-Trimetric Home
Orient View-Isometric End
Orient View-Top Ctrl+Alt+T
Orient View-Front Ctrl+Alt+F
Orient View-Right Ctrl+Alt+R
Orient View-Left Ctrl+Alt+L
Snap View F8
Evaluation – Delivery
NX 4 PAU, Course #MT10050
Dates thru
Please share your opinion in all of the following sections with a “check” in the appropriate box:
SOMEWHAT
SOMEWHAT
STRONGLY
STRONGLY
DISAGREE
DISAGREE
DISAGREE
Instructor: 5
AGREE
AGREE
AGREE
If there were 2 instructors, please evaluate the 2nd instructor with “X’s”
Instructor: 7
1. …clearly explained the course objectives
2. …was knowledgeable about the subject
3. …answered my questions appropriately
4. … encouraged questions in class
5. …was well spoken and a good communicator
6. …was well prepared to deliver the course
7. …made good use of the training time
8. …conducted themselves professionally
9. …used examples relevant to the course and audience
10. …provided enough time to complete the exercises
11. …used review and summary to emphasize important information
12. …did all they could to help the class meet the course objectives
Comments on overall impression of instructor(s):

Overall impression of instructor(s) Poor Excellent
Suggestions for improvement of course delivery:
What you liked best about the course delivery:
Class Logistics:
1. The training facilities were comfortable, clean, and provided a good learning
environment
2. The computer equipment was reliable
3. The software performed properly
4. The overhead projection unit was clear and working properly
5. The registration and confirmation process was efficient
Hotels: (We try to leverage this information to better accommodate our customers)
1. Name of the hotel Best hotel I’ve stayed at
2. Was this hotel recommended during your registration process? YES NO
3. Problem? (brief description)
SEE BACK
Evaluation - Courseware
NX 4 PAU, Course #MT10050
:
SOMEWHAT
SOMEWHAT
STRONGLY
STRONGLY
DISAGREE
DISAGREE
DISAGREE
AGREE
AGREE
AGREE
Please share your opinion for all of the following sections with a “check” in the appropriate box
Material:
1. The training material supported the course and lesson objectives
2. The training material contained all topics needed to complete the projects
3. The training material provided clear and descriptive directions
4. The training material was easy to read and understand
5. The course flowed in a logical and meaningful manner
6. How appropriate was the length of the course relative to the material? Too short Too long Just right
Comments on Course and Material:
Overall impression of course Poor Excellent
Student:
1. I met the prerequisites for the class (I had the skills I needed)
2. My objectives were consistent with the course objectives
3. I will be able to use the skills I have learned on my job
4. My expectations for this course were met
5. I am confident that with practice I will become proficient
Name (optional): Location/room
Please “check” this box if you would like your comments featured in our training publications.
(Your name is required at the bottom of this form)
Please “check” this box if you would like to receive more information on our other courses and services.
(Your name is required at the bottom of this form)
Thank you for your business. We hope to continue to provide your training
and personal development for the future.

Unigraphics Nx4 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Unigraphics Nx4 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Practical Applications of NX

Manual Unigraphics Publication

This edition obsoletes all previous editions.

Proprietary & Restricted Rights Notice

This software and related documentation are proprietary to UGS Corp.

©2006 UGS Corporation

2 Practical Applications of NX mt10050_g NX 4

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

The NX User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX 3

Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Introduction to Solid Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Positional Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

4 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

Activity — Getting Familiar with Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Edge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Introduction to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX 5

Activity — Working with the Assembly Navigator (continued) . . 10-23

Adding Components & Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

6 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

Sketches and the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Swept Features and Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX 7

Editing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Instance Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

The Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Introduction to Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

8 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

Adding Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24

Additional Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX 9

Expression Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Point Constructor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

10 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

• Open and examine models.

• Create and edit parametric solid models.

• Create and modify basic assembly structures.

• Create and modify simple drawings.

• Modify existing geometry.

• Apply the standards used in class.

©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX 11

How to Use This Course

Choose the Open icon. (File→Open)

Double-click on the parts folder.

Select the design_topic_1 part and choose OK.

12 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

The functional assignment of the mouse buttons can be reversed in

• MB2 — Mouse Button 2

• MB3 — Mouse Button 3

©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX 13

Part File Naming

Currently up to 128 characters are valid for file names. A four

14 Practical Applications of NX ©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved mt10050_g NX 4

• Commonly used expressions

• User-defined views and layouts

Once a seed part is established, it should be write-protected to avoid

The following colors are preset to indicate different object types:

Object Default Color

©UGS Corporation, All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX 15

Key in _new_1, where represents your initials.

Key in _intro_1 as the new part name where represents